2008 Saturn AURA Green Line Hybrid Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using this Manual
{CAUTION:
Many people read the owner manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle to
learn about the vehicle’s features and controls.
Pictures and words work together to explain things.
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Index
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is
an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and
the page number where it can be found.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do Not do
this” or “Do Not let
this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to
ignore the warning.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be
sure the seat is locked in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Seats
Manual Lumbar
On vehicles with this
feature, the handle is
located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Move the handle up or down repeatedly to decrease
or increase lumbar support.
In vehicles with power seats, the controls used to operate
them are located on the outboard side of the seat.
To adjust the seat, do any of the following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
{CAUTION:
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
it is locked.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seatback to an upright position,
do the following:
Power Reclining Seatbacks
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure
to the seatback and the seatback returns to
the upright position.
2. Release the lever to lock the seatback.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
it is locked.
If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control
used to recline them is located on the outboard side
of the seat behind the power seat control.
• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control
rearward.
• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the
control forward.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the restraint up to
raise it. To lower the
Head Restraints
head restraint, press the
button, located on the
top of the seatback, and
push the restraint down.
The rear seat head rests are also adjustable.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Lift Seat
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
With this feature, you can fold either side of the seatback
down for more cargo space. Make sure the front seat
is not reclined. If it is, the rear seatback will not fold
down all the way.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or
the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
To adjust a power lift seat, press the top or bottom of
the power lift seat switch to raise or lower the seat.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
{CAUTION:
To lower the rear seatback, pull on the seat tab located
on the outboard side of the seatback cushion and
fold the seatback down. This allows access to the trunk.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
To raise the rear seatback pull the seatback up and
make sure it latches. Push and pull on the seatback
to be sure it is locked in position. Make sure that
the safety belts are properly stowed over the seatback
in all three positions.
When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in the
upright locked position.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in
a seat and using a safety belt properly.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, you might not be, if you
are buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away.
Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones take the forces.
That is why safety belts make such good sense.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in
a crash — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a
good driver does not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if
I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you
are upside down.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have
to wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor
in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the
thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones and you would be less likely to slide under the
lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is
too loose. In a crash, you could slide under
the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not on the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones,
and that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash,
you would not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt. The
belt force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in
the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten
the lap belt on smaller occupants.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in
this section.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for
the driver and right front passenger position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in
a crash.
To move it up or down,
squeeze the buttons (A)
on the sides of the
height adjuster and move
the height adjuster to
the desired position.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way. When the
safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up
the safety belt webbing. The latch plate should rest
on the stitching on the safety belt, near the guide
loop on the side wall.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
After you move the adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without squeezing the buttons to
make sure it has locked into position.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort guide to
the safety belt:
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash if
the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation
are met. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags,
safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety
belts in a side crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest. These
parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of
the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the
guide and clip inward and slide them in between
the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the
loop of the elastic cord exposed.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you
go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will
wear, so the extender will be long enough for you.
To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else
use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit.
The extender has been designed for adults. Never use
it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder
belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no,
try using the rear safety belt comfort guide.
See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
information. If the shoulder belt still does not rest
on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
{CAUTION:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries
in a crash.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly
can strike other people, or can be thrown out of
the vehicle. In addition, young children should not
use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need
to use a child restraint.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in every state in the United States
and in every Canadian province says children up to
some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
People should never hold an infant in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. An infant does
not weigh much — until a crash. During a
crash an infant will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at
only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant
will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their
neck and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle
and never allow children to play with the
safety belts.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its
airbag system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection that a
child restraint system can provide.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and infants.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which
it will be used.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders.
Infants should always be secured in
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
appropriate infant restraints.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular child restraint.
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides
restraint with the
seating surface
against the back
of the infant.
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that
is unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children should always be secured
in appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing
child seat (B) provides
restraint for the
child’s body with
the harness.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint
in the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions
in this manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out
the window.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint
is not properly secured in the vehicle.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child is not properly secured
in the child restraint. Because there are
different systems, it is important to refer to
the instructions that come with the restraint.
Make sure the child is properly secured,
following the instructions that came with
that restraint.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when
no child is in it.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
{CAUTION:
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and
no one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in a
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
for additional information.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position,
study the instructions that came with your child restraint
to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
A. Occupant prohibited
B. Child restraint
using LATCH
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when
no child is in it.
A. Child restraint
using LATCH
B. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
If you secure a child restraint in the left or center rear
seat using LATCH, review the following illustrations.
Depending on where you place the child restraint,
you may not be able to access certain safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional passengers
or child restraints.
C. Child restraint using
safety belt or LATCH
or occupant using
safety belt
Configurations for Use of
Child Restraints
A. Child restraint
using LATCH
B. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
B. Child restraint
using LATCH
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and
its attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not
a kit is available.
Rear Seat
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating the lower anchors,
each rear anchor position has a label, near the
crease between the seatback and the seat cushion,
showing where the anchors are located.
The top tether anchors are located behind the rear seat
on the filler panel.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
additional information.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in
the vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be
seriously injured or killed. Make sure that a
LATCH-type child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their
neck and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Secure any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You cannot secure three child restraints using the
LATCH anchors in the rear seat at the same time,
but you can install two of them. If you want to do this,
install one LATCH child restraint in the passenger-side
position, and install the other one either in the
driver-side position or in the center position. Refer to
the following illustration to learn which anchors to use.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child
restraint manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt
assembly may cause damage to these parts. Make
sure when securing unused safety belts behind
the child restraint that there is no contact between
the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and
the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the
seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,
stowed position before folding the rear seat.
A. Passenger Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
B. Center Rear Seat Lower Anchors
If you need to secure more than one child restraint
in the rear seat, see Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-38. Depending on where you place the
child restraint, you may not be able to access certain
safety belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional
passengers or child restraints.
C. Driver Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
Make sure to attach the child restraint at the proper
anchor location.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system is designed to make installation of child
restraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not use
the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead use the vehicle’s
anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the
restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to the child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments
on the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and the
following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. If the position you are using has an
adjustable headrest or head restraint, raise it.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether under the
headrest or head restraint
and in between the
headrest or head restraint
posts. See Head Restraints
on page 1-7.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
on page 1-40 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety
belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
top tether anchor locations.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether
route the tether under the
headrest or head restraint
and in between the
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
headrest or head restraint
posts. See Head Restraints
on page 1-7.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-38.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out
of the retractor to set the lock.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-40
for more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top
tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten
the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place
to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
on this, including important safety information.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and
no one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in
a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
for additional information.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
on page 1-40 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety
belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
top tether anchor locations.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
page 3-30.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out
of the retractor to set the lock.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the
child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the
seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint.
If this happens, adjust the head restraint.
Remove any additional material from the seat such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle
and check with your dealer/retailer.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on
when the vehicle is started.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must
inflate very quickly to do their job.
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right
front passenger.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
{CAUTION:
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected
from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints”
to the safety belts. All airbags are designed to
work with safety belts, but do not replace them.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on
the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than
the blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against,
or very close to, any airbag when it inflates
can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you
would be if you were sitting on the edge of your
seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help keep
you in position before and during a crash.
Always wear your safety belt, even with airbags.
The driver should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags and roof-rail
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe crashes where something hits the side
of your vehicle. They are not designed to
inflate in frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or
roof-rail airbags.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where Are the Airbags?
{CAUTION:
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the
best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
There is an airbag
readiness light on
the instrument panel
cluster, which shows
the airbag symbol.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The
path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie down through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate
to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce
the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s
or right front passenger’s head and chest. However,
they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds
a predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy
is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit, the direction
of the impact, and how quickly your vehicle
slows down.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are
not intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck. A roof-rail airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and severity of the
side impact.
Your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags
are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail
airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the
system’s designed threshold level. The threshold
level can vary with specific vehicle design.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends
an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag
causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy.
The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag module.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe
side collisions, even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by
safety belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles
with seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are
airbag modules in the side of the front seatbacks
closest to the door. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling
of the vehicle, near the side windows that have
occupant seating positions.
But airbags would not help in many types of
collisions, primarily because the occupant’s motion
is not toward those airbags. See When Should an
Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated
for some time after they deploy. Some components
of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes.
For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust
in the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma
or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon
as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by
opening a window or a door. If you experience
breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical
attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with
you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in
the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn
the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when you start your vehicle.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are
using remote start to start your vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check.
When the system check is complete, either the word
ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol
for off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag under certain conditions. The driver’s
airbags are not part of the passenger sensing system.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger’s seat.
The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and
no one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in
a rear seat, even if the airbag(s) are off.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag if:
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present
in a rear-facing infant seat.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that
the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint
into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline
the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if
possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and check
with your dealer/retailer.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbags are off. See
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime
the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbags are active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, depending
upon the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child
restraints should wear a safety belt properly — whether
or not there is an airbag for that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any
additional material from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers
and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully
upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered
on the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for two to three minutes.
This will allow the system to detect that person and
then enable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on
the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and
“Child Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
page 1-68 for more information about modifications
that can affect how the system operates.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-29 for more on this, including
important safety information.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat cushion
and seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several
places around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and
the service manual have information about servicing
your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase
a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag system.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close
to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front passenger’s
position, which includes sensors that are part
of the passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing
system may not operate properly if the original
seat trim is replaced with non-GM covers,
upholstery or trim, or with GM covers,
upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater
or a comfort enhancing pad or device, installed
under or on top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the passenger
sensing system. This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent
the passenger sensing system from properly
turning off the passenger airbag(s). See
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about the location of
the airbag sensors, sensing and diagnostic module
and airbag wiring.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure
on page 7-2.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-29 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see
See your dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was
being used during a crash, you may need new
LATCH system parts.
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being
used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system
earlier in this section.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured
or killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-7.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter does not
work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle
for the transmitter to work, try this:
If the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked,
and the trunk can be opened from about 3 feet (1 m)
up to 197 feet (60 m) away with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Q (Lock): Press Qto lock all the doors. The interior
lamps will turn off after all of the doors are closed.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the remote lock feedback can be programmed to have
the horn chirp and/or the turn signals flash when the
RKE transmitter is used to lock the vehicle’s doors. See
“LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC Vehicle
Pressing Qmay also arm the content theft-deterrent
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
K (Unlock): Press K to unlock the driver’s door.
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and
If K is pressed again within five seconds, all remaining
doors unlock. The interior lamps turn on and stay
on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the remote unlock feedback
can be programmed to have the horn chirp and/or
the turn signals flash when the RKE transmitter is used
to unlock the vehicle’s doors. See “UNLOCK HORN”
and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-51 for more information.
hold Vfor about one second to open the trunk.
The trunk can be opened with the transmitter when
the vehicle speed is less than 2 mph (3 km/h) or when
the ignition is off.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
Lto locate your vehicle. The horn sounds three times
and the headlamps and turn signals flash three times.
Press and hold Lfor about three seconds to initiate the
panic alarm. The horn sounds and the headlamps and
turn signals flash for 30 seconds. Press Lagain
to cancel the panic alarm.
If enabled through the DIC, and it is dark enough
outside, the vehicle’s high-beam headlamps, parking
lamps, and back-up lamps will turn on each time K on
the transmitter is pressed. These exterior lamps will
stay on for 20 seconds, or until a door is opened.
See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS” under DIC Vehicle
Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is
lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through
your retailer. All transmitters need to be re-coded to
match the new transmitter. The lost transmitter will no
longer work after the new transmitters are re-coded.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters
matched to it.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter will disarm
the content theft-deterrent system. See Content
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT (Battery)
LOW message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB
BATT (Battery) LOW” under DIC Warnings and
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter:
1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat,
thin object inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
From the outside, use your key or Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has one. Turn the
key counterclockwise to unlock the door.
Door Locks
From the inside, lock and unlock the door by moving the
manual lock knob down and up, or by using the power
door lock switches.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Power Door Locks
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
The power door lock switches are located on the
driver’s and front passenger’s door.
Press the outboard side of the switch to unlock all doors.
Press the inboard side of the switch to lock all doors.
The rear doors do not have power door lock switches.
Rear seat passengers must use the manual lock
knob on their doors.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a door is opened before the five seconds has elapsed,
the doors do not lock until five seconds after all doors
are closed.
Door Ajar Reminder
If one of the doors is not fully closed while the ignition
is on and the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL (N) the following will occur:
If the power door lock switch or the transmitter lock
button is pressed twice when leaving the vehicle, the
doors lock immediately.
• A chime will sound.
If the power door unlock switch or the transmitter unlock
button is pressed, the doors unlock immediately and
do not lock automatically after the doors are closed.
• The DOOR AJAR message will display through
the Driver Information Center (DIC) until the
door is closed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-46.
This feature is turned on at the factory but may be
turned off through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
Delayed Locking
This feature allows the driver to delay the locking of the
vehicle. It will not operate with the key in the ignition.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Press the driver’s power door lock switch or the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock button
once. With the key removed from the ignition and
the driver’s door open, the following occurs:
Your vehicle is programmed at the factory to lock all
doors automatically when the following are met:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• Three chimes sound to signal the delay.
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK (P).
This feature cannot be disabled.
• All doors will lock and the turn signals flash once
five seconds after the last door has been closed.
• The horn chirps if the horn chirp feature is enabled.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the shift lever is moved back to PARK (P),
all doors will unlock.
To assist you in finding the lock, your vehicle will have
one of the following:
If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors are
locked, have that person use the manual lock knob
or power door unlock switch.
The power door unlock function can be programmed
through prompts displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). These prompts allow you to choose unlock
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has rear door security locks, that prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
The rear door security locks are located on the inside
edge of each rear door. You must open the rear doors
to access them.
To use these locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
Trunk
To open the trunk from the outside, press the trunk
release button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the power door
lock switch, or by lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
{CAUTION:
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
Lockout Protection
This feature prevents the driver’s door from being
locked using the power door locks, if the key is left in
the ignition and a door is open.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System.
Press the power door lock switch to lock all the doors
and then unlock the driver’s door.
Press and hold the power door lock switch for more
than three seconds to override this feature.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
If the key is removed from the ignition, or if the manual
door lock or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is used, the key could still be locked inside
the vehicle. Always remember to take the key with you.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Trunk Release
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Press the button located
on the driver’s door near
the map pocket to open
the trunk.
The trunk can only be opened while the vehicle is
in PARK (P).
To close the trunk use the pullstrap located on the
trunk lid.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the trunk latch.
This handle glows following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle up to open the trunk from the inside.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm
or hot weather.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Up Window
Power Windows
On windows with this feature, pull the switch up to the
second position and release the switch to activate
the express-up feature. To stop the window as it is
raising, pull up or press down briefly on the switch again.
The power window
switches are located
on the armrest on the
driver’s door. In addition,
each passenger door
has a switch for its
own window.
Programming the Power Windows
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, you will need to
reprogram the driver’s power window for the express-up
feature to work. Replace or recharge the vehicle’s
battery before reprogramming.
To program the driver’s window, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active, close all doors.
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window has an express-down feature.
This switch is labeled AUTO. Press the front of
the switch part way, and the driver’s window opens
a small amount. If the front of the switch is pressed
all the way down and released, the window goes
all the way down automatically.
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
window is fully open.
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window
is fully closed.
4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately
two seconds after the window is completely
closed.
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the front
of the switch momentarily. To raise the window,
pull and hold the front of the switch.
The window is now reprogrammed.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second position. The window
rises for as long as the switch is held. Once the
switch is released, the express mode is re-activated.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when the
express-up is active, the window stops at the obstruction
and auto-reverse to a preset factory position. Weather
conditions such as severe icing may also cause the
window to auto-reverse. The window returns to normal
operation once the obstruction or condition is removed.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
Window Lockout
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
The driver’s power window controls also include a
lockout button.
{CAUTION:
o (Window Lockout): Press the lockout button to
stop the rear passengers from using their window
switches. The driver and front passenger can still
operate all the windows with the lock on. When the
red part of the switch is visible you have returned
to normal window operation.
If express override is activated, the window
will not reverse automatically. You or others
could be injured and the window could be
damaged. Before you use express override,
make sure that all people and obstructions
are clear of the window path.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sun Visors
Content Theft-Deterrent
To block out glare, swing down the visors. They can
also be removed from the center mount and swung to
the side, to block out glare from the side. The visors
also have extenders that can be pulled out.
Your vehicle may have
a content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
Your vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrors
located on the passenger and driver side visors.
A light turns on when the cover is lifted.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal.
Arming the System
With the ignition off, you can arm the system by
pressing the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
lock button.
The system will arm 30 seconds after all the doors are
closed, or 60 seconds with any door open.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a second
time while all the doors are closed, the system will
arm immediately. The system will still arm in 60 seconds
if a door is open. When the open door is closed,
the system will arm.
Disarming the System
To disarm the system, do one of the following:
• Press the RKE transmitter unlock button.
• Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
The security light, located on the instrument panel
cluster, comes on to indicate that arming has been
initiated. Once the system is armed, the security light
will flash once every three seconds.
If you want to lock the vehicle without arming the
content theft system, lock the vehicle with the manual
lock knob on the doors or with the inside power
door lock switches.
If the security light is flashing twice per second, this
means that a door is open.
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will
stop flashing.
If the system is armed and the key is used to unlock
the vehicle, the alarm will be activated.
How the System Alarm is Activated
If you do not want to arm the content theft system,
lock the vehicle with the manual lock knob on the
doors or with the inside power door lock switches.
To activate the system if it is armed:
• Open the driver’s door or trunk. A ten second
pre-alarm chirp will sound followed by a
thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.
The alarm will sound and the exterior lights will flash
if any door is opened while armed.
• Open any other door. A full alarm of horn and
lights will immediately sound for thirty seconds.
• Open the hood. If the vehicle has the remote start
feature, it will activate the full alarm.
When an alarm event has finished, the system will
re-arm itself automatically.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
To turn off the system alarm:
• Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
The system will then re-arm itself.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
This will also disarm the system.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on.
This will also disarm the system.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
If you hear three chirps when the unlock or lock
button is pressed on the RKE transmitter, it means
that the content theft security system alarm was
previously triggered.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears
to be not damaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
page 5-87. If the engine still does not start with the other
key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does
start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer
who can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new
key made. In an emergency, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-7.
It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to
“learn” the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are
lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to
have keys made and programmed to the system.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not
start and the security light on the instrument panel
cluster comes on, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the new key:
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start,
see your dealer/retailer for service.
New Vehicle Break-In
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to
the ON/RUN position within five seconds of the
original key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Do not exceed
5,000 engine rpm. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are
to be programmed.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you may be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced by
your dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by
the PASS-Key® III+ system at this time.
If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost or damaged, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 (LOCK/OFF): This is the only position from which
the key can be removed. It also locks the ignition
and transmission. A warning chime sounds if the driver’s
door is opened while the ignition is off and the key is
left in the ignition.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition
switch, you can turn it to
four different positions.
ACC (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things
like the radio and windshield wipers while the engine
is not running.
R (ON/RUN): This position unlocks the ignition. It is
also the position to where the key returns after you
release the switch and the engine starts. The switch will
stay in this position while the engine is running. But
even while the engine is not running, you can use
ON/RUN to operate the electrical accessories, and to
display some instrument panel warning lights.
In order to shift out of PARK (P), ignition must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake
pedal must be applied.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. You might not be able to start your vehicle if the
battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is in all the way.
If none of this works, then your vehicle needs
service.
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch
will return to the ON/RUN position for normal driving.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These features continue to work up to 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF.
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is
an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave
the key in the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime
sounds, when the driver’s door is opened. Always
remember to remove the key from the ignition and take
it with you. This locks your ignition and transmission.
Also, always remember to lock the doors.
The power windows, heated seats, and sunroof will
work until any door is opened.
The radio continues to work until the driver’s door
is opened.
All these features operate when the key is in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
The battery could be drained if the key is left in the
ignition while your vehicle is parked. You might not be
able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for
an extended period of time.
Starting the Engine
(Automatic Engine Start/Stop)
The shift lever must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
for the vehicle to start. To restart when the vehicle
is already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Sunroof (if equipped)
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START for
up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of
the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up
and lubricates all moving parts.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed goes down as
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up
and lubricate all moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the
engine and protects components. If the key is
turned to the START position, and then released
when the engine begins cranking, the engine
continues cranking for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and
the key is held in START for many seconds,
cranking stops after 15 seconds to prevent cranking
motor damage. To prevent gear damage, this
system also prevents cranking if the engine is
already running. Engine cranking can be stopped
by turning the ignition switch to the
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has an automatic engine start/stop feature.
After the engine is started and has reached operating
temperature, the AUTO STOP feature may cause
the engine to turn off when you apply the brakes and
come to a complete stop. When you take your foot
off the brake pedal or press the accelerator pedal,
the engine will start. The engine will continue to run
until the next AUTO STOP.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop
{CAUTION:
Exiting your vehicle, without first shifting into
PARK (P), may cause the vehicle to move, you
or others may be injured. Because your vehicle
has the Automatic Engine Start/Stop feature,
your vehicle’s engine might seem to be shut
off, however, once the brake pedal is released,
the engine could start up again.
The AUTO STOP symbol on the tachometer signifies
that the engine is in AUTO STOP mode. See Auto Stop
vehicle is turned off, the tachometer will move to OFF.
If the driver’s door is opened while in AUTO STOP
mode, a chime will sound.
Shift to PARK (P) and turn the ignition to OFF,
before exiting the vehicle.
To restart the engine during the AUTO STOP,
release the brake pedal or press the accelerator
pedal. The engine starts immediately. The vehicle
continues to run until the next stop.
There are several conditions which may prevent an
AUTO STOP or cause an AUTO START.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Engine Will Remain Running When:
The Engine Will Restart When:
• The brake pedal is released.
• The engine, transmission, or hybrid battery is
not warmed up yet.
• The accelerator pedal is applied.
• The outside temperature is less than 5°F (−15°C).
• When shifting out of DRIVE (D) to any other gear.
• While the A/C is in Normal Mode.
• If the Hybrid A/C button is selected, the duration
of the AUTO STOP will depend on the outside
temperature. This economy mode improves
fuel economy by limiting the effects of the air
conditioning. The warmer it is outside, the shorter
the time before the engine is restarted to provide
cabin cooling.
• A/C is in Hybrid Mode and the climate control system
is working to cool the vehicle. See Automatic Climate
• Defrost is selected.
• The shift lever is in PARK (P), NEUTRAL (N),
REVERSE (R), INTERMEDIATE (I) or LOW (L).
• The climate control system is turned from Off to
Normal A/C or defrost See Automatic Climate
• The hybrid battery pack charge is low.
• The 12V vehicle battery charge is low, or loads
are high.
• The engine is required to run for either heater or
climate control performance. See “Air Conditioning
Engine Start/Stop” under Automatic Climate Control
• The hood is not fully closed.
• The hybrid battery pack charge is low and requires
recharging.
• Auto Stop time is greater than two minutes.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{CAUTION:
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in
cold weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C)
for easier starting and better fuel economy during
engine warm-up. Plug in the coolant heater at least
four hours before starting your vehicle. An internal
thermostat in the plug-end of the cord may exist which
will prevent engine coolant heater operation at
temperatures above 0° F (−18° C).
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord
will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
engine coolant heater cord is located near the air
cleaner box on the passenger side of the engine
compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-14 for more information on location.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature,
the kind of oil you have, and some other things.
Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that
you contact your dealer/retailer in the area where you
will be parking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can
give you the best advice for that particular area.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt
AC outlet.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{CAUTION:
The shift lever is located on the console between
the seats.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
There are several different
positions for the automatic
transmission.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start the
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to
fully apply the regular brakes first and then press the
shift lever button before shifting from PARK (P) when
the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out
of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever and
push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) while
maintaining brake application. Then press the shift
lever button and move the shift lever into another gear.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine
is not running at high speed when shifting your
vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving with
the automatic transmission. It provides the best
fuel economy for your vehicle. If you need more power
for passing, and you are:
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
snow, ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h),
push the accelerator pedal about halfway down.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
• Going above 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator all the way down.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used for
normal driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed
without using your brakes for slight downgrades
where the vehicle would otherwise accelerate due
to steepness of grade. If constant upshifting or
downshifting occurs while driving up steep hills,
this position can be used to prevent repetitive types of
shifts. You might choose INTERMEDIATE (I) instead
of DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly, winding roads,
so that there is less shifting between gears.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake,
push down the parking
brake pedal with your
left foot. If the ignition
is on, the brake system
warning light will come on.
See Brake System
page 3-32.
The engine will not Auto Stop when the shifter is in
INTERMEDIATE (I). See Starting the Engine (Automatic
Engine Start/Stop) on page 2-21
LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speed more
than INTERMEDIATE (I) without actually using the
brakes. Use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or
mud. If the shift lever is put in LOW (L), the transmission
will not shift into LOW (L) until the vehicle is going
slowly enough.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot. Push down momentarily
on the parking brake pedal with your left foot until you
feel the pedal release. If the parking brake is not
released when you begin to drive, the brake system
warning light will be on and a chime will sound warning
you that the parking brake is still on.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The PUSH PARK PEDAL message will also appear
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) to remind you
to release the parking brake. See DIC Warnings
Shifting Into PARK (P)
{CAUTION:
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before driving.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow.
Regenerative Braking
Regenerative braking takes some of the energy from
the moving vehicle and turns it back into electrical
energy. This energy is then stored back into the
vehicle’s hybrid battery system, contributing to
increased fuel efficiency.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
The system works whenever you take your foot off
the accelerator pedal while your vehicle is moving
in a forward gear. This causes your vehicle to
slow down slightly faster. It may feel like the brake
pedal is being pressed, even when it is not.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the
button on the shift lever while pushing the shift
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF/LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle can put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. It could be difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into PARK (P)
on page 2-29.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you might need to have
another vehicle push your vehicle a little uphill to take
some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the
transmission, this should let you pull the shift lever out
of PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running,
be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the parking brake
is firmly set before leaving it. After moving the shift lever
into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then,
see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)
without first pushing the shift lever button.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully
locked in PARK (P).
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the
shift lever button again.
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in PARK (P) with the shift lever button
fully released, and
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
PARK (P), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal
is applied.
Parking Over Things That Burn
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
information.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
There is something about your vehicle that can
make it move suddenly, and you or others can
be seriously injured. This can happen if the
vehicle is in the Auto Stop mode, and the shift
lever is in DRIVE (D). Because your vehicle has
the Automatic Engine Start/Stop feature, your
vehicle’s engine might seem to be shut off
when you come to a complete stop. However,
if you then start to exit the vehicle, as soon as
you take your foot off the brake pedal, the
engine will start again and the vehicle can
move forward. If you are going to exit your
vehicle, first shift to PARK (P) and turn the
ignition to LOCK/OFF. Then exit.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set the parking brake and move the shift lever
to PARK (P).
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Mirror
Mirrors
While cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror housing.
Manual Rearview Mirror
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or
down and side to side. The day/night adjustment allows
you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps
behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime use
and pull it for nighttime use.
Outside Power Mirrors
The controls for the
outside power mirrors
are located on the inside
of the vehicle near the
driver’s side mirror.
Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®
While you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or
down and side to side. The day/night adjustment allows
you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps
behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime use
and pull it for nighttime use.
There are also OnStar® buttons located at the bottom
of the mirror face. See your dealer/retailer for more
information on the system and how to subscribe
more information about the services OnStar® provides.
Use the selector switch located above the four-way
control panel to choose either the left or right outside
mirror. Then press the control pad to move the selected
mirror in the desired direction.
Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your
vehicle and the area beside and behind your vehicle.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your airbags deploy, the system is designed to
make an automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors
who can request emergency services be sent to
your location. If you lock your keys in the vehicle,
call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send
a signal to unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar button and they can
contact Roadside Service for you.
Heated Outside Mirrors
If your vehicle has this feature, the surface of the
outside mirrors will heat when the rear window defogger
is activated. See “Rear Window Defogger” under
more information.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your
OnStar service at any time by contacting OnStar.
A complete OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar
Terms and Conditions are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar Subscriber glove box literature. For more
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or
TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button
to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
If your vehicle has this feature, the driver’s side
mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you.
This feature is controlled by the automatic dimming
inside rearview mirror.
OnStar® System
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar Services
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan, or
the Directions & Connections Plan is included for one
year from the date of purchase. You can extend this plan
beyond the first year, or upgrade to the Directions &
Connections Plan. For more information, press the
OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Some OnStar
services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle
Location Assistance) may not be available until you
register with OnStar.
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
• RideAssist
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Information and Convenience Services
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also
be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S.
or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with
an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or
calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Virtual Advisor
How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and
stock quotes. By pressing the phone button and
giving a few simple voice commands, you can browse
through the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s
Guide for more information (Only available in the
continental U.S.).
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an OnStar
Call Center at the time of an OnStar button press,
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN
system deploys. The vehicle information usually
includes your GPS location and, in the event of a
crash, additional information regarding the accident
that your vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction
from which your vehicle was hit). When you use the
Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling,
your vehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location
so that we can provide you with location-based services.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
for more information.
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in
a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar
service also cannot work unless you are in a place
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for
that area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas, or at all times.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button
for a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR”
to activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for
more information.
Location information about your vehicle is only available if
the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and available.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of your
vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network congestion.
Cupholder(s)
Your Responsibility
Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the
OnStar advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons
is red, this means that your system is not functioning
properly and should be checked by your dealer/retailer.
If the light appears clear (no light is appearing), your
OnStar subscription has expired. You can always
press the OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar
equipment is active.
There are two removable cupholders and additional
storage areas located at the rear of the shift lever.
To access, push the button and the cover will slide back
automatically. To close, slide the cover forward and
lock into place.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear of
the vehicle. Store small loads as far forward as possible.
The net should not be used to store heavy loads.
Sunroof
On vehicles with a sunroof,
the switch is located on
the headliner between
the map lamps.
Pull down the door on the back of the center console
to use the rear seat cupholders.
Center Console Storage
The sunroof will only operate while the ignition is in
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or if Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
Your vehicle has a center console with two storage
areas. To access the upper tray storage, lift the
passenger side lever. To access the lower storage
area, lift the driver side lever.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the back of the switch and release it to open
the sunroof to the vent position. From the vent
position, press and release the back of the switch
to express-open the sunroof. To stop the sunroof
from express opening, press the switch again. If the
sunshade is closed, it will open automatically when
the sunroof opens past the vented position.
Sunshade
The automatic sunshade
control is located on the
headliner, between
the map lamp controls.
A deflector will automatically raise when the sunroof
is opened. The deflector will retract when the sunroof
is closed.
To close the sunroof, press the front of the switch
and hold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof
will stop if the switch is released. Close the sunshade
by hand.
The sunshade can be independently opened or closed
while the panoramic sunroof is closed. To express-open
or express-close the sunshade, press and release
the control rearward or forward. The sunshade
will retract to the full-open or closed position. To stop
the movement of the sunshade, press the control
a second time. To close the sunshade to a particular
position, continue to press the control and release
it when the desired position is reached.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed
if the vehicle has an electrical failure.
Notice: If you force the sunshade forward of the
sliding glass panel, damage will occur and the
sunroof may not open or close properly. Always
close the glass panel before closing the sunshade.
The sunshade cannot be opened or closed if the vehicle
has an electrical failure.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
K. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).
D. Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever. See
on page 2-26.
Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
The hazard warning flashers let you warn the police and
others that you have a problem. The front and rear
turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel
A tilt and telescope wheel lets you adjust the position of
the steering wheel.
The hazard warning
flasher button is on the
instrument panel.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press again to turn the
flashers completely off.
The hazard warning flashers work even if the key is not
in the ignition switch.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
T
To tilt and telescope the steering wheel, pull down the
lever. Then move the steering wheel up or down or
backward or forward into a comfortable position.
Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the tilt and telescope lever while driving.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
let you signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever returns automatically
to the normal position.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in
the direction of the turn or
lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete
your lane change. The lever returns by itself when it
is released.
• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
If the arrows flash rapidly or do not go on at all as you
signal a turn or lane change, a signal bulb could be
burned out and other drivers will not see your turn signal.
on page 3-13.
Replace burned out bulbs to help avoid an accident.
page 5-87.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high
beam, push the turn signal/multifunction lever away
from you.
This light comes on in the
instrument panel cluster if
the high beam lamps
are turned on while the
ignition is in ON/RUN.
Use this lever, located on the right side of the steering
wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
9(Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off the
windshield wipers.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
&(Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers): Move the
lever to this position for intermittent or speed sensitive
operation. The amount of delay time varies between
wiping cycles due to the delay setting selected or
the speed of the vehicle. As vehicle speed is increased
or decreased, the wiper interval will also increase or
decrease.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker stops the motor until it cools. Clear
away snow or ice to prevent an overload. If the motor
gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear away the snow
or ice, and then turn the wipers back on.
x(Delay): While the lever is in the intermittent
position, turn the intermittent adjust band with this
symbol on it up or down to select a shorter or longer
delay between wiping cycles. To the left of the
adjust band are bars, increasing in size from bottom to
top, that indicate the frequency of the wipes. Smaller
bars mean the wipers movement is less frequent.
Larger bars mean the movement is more frequent.
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for
more than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps turn
on automatically. They turn off 15 seconds after
the wipers are turned off.
6 (Low Speed): Move the lever up to the
first setting past intermittent, for steady wiping at low
speed.
Windshield Washer
To wash the windshield, press the button at the end of
the lever until the washers begin.
1 (High Speed): Move the lever up to the second
setting past intermittent, for wiping at a high speed.
8(Mist): Move the lever all the way down to
this position for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there until
the windshield wipers start; then let go. The windshield
wipers stop after one wiping cycle. If additional
wiping cycles are needed, hold the lever down longer.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Damaged wiper blades can prevent you from seeing well
enough to drive safely. Clear ice and snow from the
wiper blades before using them to prevent damage.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
damaged, get new blades.
When the button is released, the washers stop,
but the wipers continue to wipe about three times
or resume the previous speed.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Cruise control lets a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more be maintained without keeping your foot on the
accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise
control does not work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
The cruise control
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
buttons are located on
the steering wheel.
I(On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control system
on and off.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RES+ (Resume): Press RES+ to resume a set speed
and to accelerate the speed.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brakes. This disengages the
cruise control. The cruise symbol in the instrument panel
cluster also goes out indicating cruise is no longer
engaged. To return to your previously set speed, you do
not need to go through the set process again. Once
at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, briefly
press the RES+.
SET− (Set): Press SET– to set a speed and to
decrease the speed.
To set a speed do the following:
1. Press Ito turn cruise control on. The indicator
light on the button comes on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
This takes the vehicle back up to the previously chosen
speed and stays there.
3. Press the SET− and release it. The cruise symbol
displays in the instrument panel cluster to show
the system is engaged.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.
• If the cruise control system is already engaged,
press the RES+. Hold it there until the desired
speed is reached and then release the button.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control automatically disengages. See Traction
conditions allow, the cruise control can be used again.
• To increase the vehicle speed in very small
amounts, briefly press the RES+ and then release
it. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control works on hills depends
upon the vehicle’s speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle at a lower
speed. When the brakes are applied this ends the cruise
control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble
and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
If the cruise control system is already engaged:
• Push and hold the SET− until the desired
lower speed is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts,
briefly push the SET−. Each time this
is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Ending Cruise Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to disengage the cruise control:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal,
the vehicle slows down to the previously set
cruise control speed.
• Step lightly on the brake pedal; when cruise control
disengages, the cruise symbol in the instrument
panel cluster goes out.
• Press the Ibutton, to turn off the cruise control
system.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The exterior lamp control has the following
four positions:
Headlamps
2(Headlamps): Turn the band to this position to turn
on the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps.
;(Parking Lamps): Turn the band to this position to
turn on the parking lamps and taillamps only.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Turn the band
to this position to automatically turn on the Daytime
Running Lamps during daytime, and the headlamps,
parking lamps, and taillamps at night.
P(Off/On): Turn the band to this position to turn
on the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada,
this position only works when a vehicle is in the
PARK (P) position.
The band on the lever on the outboard side of the
steering column operates the exterior lamps.
To turn on the Automatic Headlamp System, turn the
switch to off/on. To turn them off, turn the switch to off/on
again. This is a momentary control switch that springs
back when released. The Automatic Headlamp System
always turns on at the beginning of an ignition cycle.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps on Reminder
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL
are helpful in many different driving conditions, but they
can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn
and before sunset. Fully functional DRL are required on
all vehicles first sold in Canada. The vehicle has a light
sensor on top of the instrument panel that controls the
DRL. Make sure it is not covered, or the head lamps will
be on when they are not needed.
If you open the driver’s door and turn off the ignition
while leaving the lamps on, you will hear a warning
chime.
Headlamps Off in PARK (P)
This feature works when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and it is dark outside. To turn the headlamps off
when it is dark outside but keep other exterior lights on,
turn the exterior lamp control to the parking lamp position.
The DRL system makes the low-beam headlamps come
on at a reduced brightness when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
To turn on the headlamps along with the other lamps
when it is dark outside, turn the exterior lamp control to
the AUTO or headlamp position.
This function does not work for vehicles first sold in
Canada.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The exterior lamps control is in the parking lamps
only position (This applies only to vehicles that
are first sold in Canada).
Delayed Headlamps
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
The delayed headlamps feature keeps the headlamps
on for 20 seconds after the key is turned to LOCK/OFF,
then the headlamps automatically turn off.
• The parking brake is released or the vehicle is not
in PARK.
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, parking lamps, and instrument panel lights are not
on unless you turn the exterior lamps control to the
parking lamp position.
To override the 20 second delayed headlamp feature
while it is active turn the turn signal/multifunction
lever up one position and then back to AUTO.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when they are needed.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system comes on immediately. Once
the vehicle leaves the garage, it takes about one minute
for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL
if it is light outside. During that delay, the instrument
panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure
the instrument panel brightness control is in the full
bright position. See “Instrument Panel Brightness
page 3-16.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic headlamp
system turns on the headlamps at the normal brightness
along with other lamps such as the taillamps,
sidemarker, parking lamps, and the instrument panel
lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrument
panel that controls the automatic headlamp system.
Make sure it is not covered or the automatic headlamp
system will be on when it is not needed.
To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system
off, turn the ignition on and set the exterior light
switch to the off/on position. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, the transmission must stay in PARK (P) for
this function.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the DRL and the automatic
headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or
bright overhead street lights does not affect the system.
The DRL and automatic headlamp systems will only
be affected when the light sensor sees a change
in lighting lasting longer than this delay.
The regular headlamps should be used when needed.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Dome Lamp
If the vehicle has a dome lamp with a switch,
the following are the settings.
The control for this
feature is located on the
instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel.
9(Off): Move the lever to this position to turn
the lamp off, even when a door is open.
1 (Door): Move the lever to this position so that
the lamp comes on when a door is opened.
+(On): Move the lever to this position to turn
the dome lamp on.
Entry/Exit Lighting
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the lights.
The lamps inside the vehicle come on when any door
is opened. These lamps fade out about 20 seconds after
all of the doors have been closed or when the ignition
is turned to ON/RUN. They also come on when the
unlock symbol button or the horn symbol is pressed on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system transmitter.
The lamps inside the vehicle stay on for about
20 seconds after the key is removed from the ignition
to provide light as you exit.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parade Dimming
Battery Run-Down Protection
Parade dimming is a separate lighting mode that comes
on while the parking lamps are turned on during the
day. It prevents the display lights and indicator
lights from being dim, while the parking lamps are
used during the day.
Your vehicle has a battery run-down feature designed to
protect the vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp (trunk, reading lamps, or dome
lamp) is left on when the ignition is turned off, the
battery run-down protection system automatically shuts
the lamp off after 20 minutes. This prevents draining
of the battery.
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
To reactivate the interior lamps, do one of the following:
• Open any door.
The vehicle may have reading lamps on the overhead
console. These lamps come on when the doors are
opened if the lamp switch is not in the OFF position.
Press the side of each lamp to turn them on and
off, while the doors are closed.
• Press any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter button.
• Press the power door lock switch.
• Press the remote trunk release.
Overhead Ambient Lighting
These lamps will automatically turn on and off as
controlled by the light sensor located on top of the
instrument panel.
• Turn the lamp that was left on to off and then
to on again.
Trunk Lamp
The trunk lamp comes on when the trunk is opened and
turns off when the trunk is closed.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
There are two accessory power outlets. One accessory
power outlet is inside the center storage console and
the other is located on the center storage console below
the climate controls.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
To use an outlet, lift the protective cap. When not in
use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
The accessory power outlet is operational at all times.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your retailer for additional information
on the accessory power outlet.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following are climate control settings that use
more fuel:
Climate Controls
• Normal air conditioning mode.
• The defrost mode.
Automatic Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in your vehicle can
be automatically controlled with this system.
• Extreme temperature settings, such as
60°F (15°C) / 90F (32°C).
• High fan speed settings.
To help reduce fuel usage:
• Use the full automatic control as described under
Automatic Operation.
• Use hybrid air conditioning, instead of the normal
air conditioning.
• Select a temperature setting that is higher in hot
weather and lower in cold weather.
• Only use defrost to clear the windows.
Climate Control Influence on Hybrid
Operation and Fuel Economy
The climate control system is dependent upon other
vehicle systems for heat and power input. Certain
climate control settings can lead to higher fuel usage
and/or fewer Auto Stops.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Set the temperature.
Automatic Operation
An initial setting of 73°F (23°C) is recommended.
Allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate.
AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTO on both the fan
speed knob and the air delivery mode knob to activate
the automatic system. When automatic operation is
active the system controls the inside temperature and
air delivery.
Press the w or xarrow temperature buttons
to adjust the temperature setting as necessary.
If the temperature is set at 60°F (15°C) the system
remains at the maximum cooling setting. If the
temperature is set at 90°F (32°C) the system
remains at the maximum heat setting. Choosing
either maximum setting does not cause the vehicle
to heat or cool any faster.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in full
automatic control:
1. Turn the fan knob and the mode knob to the AUTO
position.
Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the
top of the instrument panel near the windshield.
This sensor regulates air temperature based on the
intensity of the sun.
The current set temperature displays. When AUTO
is selected, the air conditioning operation and air
inlet is automatically controlled. The air conditioning
compressor runs while the outside temperature is
over about 40°F (4°C). The air inlet is normally
set to outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet can
automatically switch to recirculate inside air to
help quickly cool down the vehicle.
Also do not cover the sensor grille on the lower
right side of the climate control faceplate, as
this regulates the inside temperature.
To avoid blowing cold air at engine start-up in cold
weather, the system delays turning on the fan
until warm air is available. The length of delay
depends on the engine coolant temperature. Turning
the fan knob overrides this delay and changes
the fan to the selected speed.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Operation
6(Floor): Use this mode to direct most of the air to
the floor outlets with some air directed to the side
window outlets.
The air delivery mode or fan speed, can manually
be adjusted.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost modes. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
Fan Speed Knob
9(Off): Select this position to turn off the fan.
Outside air still enters the vehicle. The direction
can be changed by changing the mode position.
The temperature can also be adjusted using either
the up or down arrow temperature buttons.
#(Normal Air Conditioning): Press this button to
turn the air conditioning compressor on and off. A light
above the button comes on while the air conditioning
is on.
9(Fan): Turn the knob with the fan symbol to
When air conditioning is selected or is in AUTO mode,
the system runs the air conditioning automatically to
cool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle.
manually adjust the fan speed.
w x Temperature Control: Press the w and
While in this mode, the hybrid system does not shut the
engine down at complete stops.
x arrows to increase or decrease the temperature
inside the vehicle.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for
your vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows
closed for the air conditioner to work its best.
Air Delivery Mode Knob
H(Vent): Use this mode to direct air to the instrument
panel outlets.
On cool, but sunny days while using manual operation
of the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warm
air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument
panel outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, press
the temperature buttons to the desired setting.
)(Bi-Level): Use this mode to direct half of the air
to the instrument panel outlets, and the remaining air to
the floor outlets.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In AUTO mode the system cools and dehumidifies the
air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode,
the system maximizes its performance by using
recirculation as necessary.
pressed, an indicator light above the button comes on.
The recirculation indicator light blinks three times if
recirculation is used in a mode in which it cannot
function. Only use this mode when it is needed for
comfort, since window fogging rapidly occurs if the air
conditioning compressor is not engaged.
Heating: On cold days when using manual operation of
the automatic system, use floor mode to deliver air to
the floor outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, push
the temperature buttons to the desired setting.
Press this button to cancel the auto recirculation
feature. Each time the vehicle is started, the system
reverts to the auto recirculation function.
To use the automatic mode, turn the knob to AUTO and
adjust the temperature by pressing the temperature
buttons.
If recirculation is selected while in defrost, defog or floor
mode, the light on the button flashes three times and
then goes out to indicate that this is not allowed. This is
to prevent window fogging.
When the heater is in use, there might be slight noise or
vibration during Auto Stops. This is due to the coolant
circulation pump that continues to circulate heat through
the system during the engine Auto Stop.
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the
system in recirculation for extended periods of time can
cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the
fog, select either defog or defrost. Make sure the
air conditioning is on. Allow the air conditioning to run
automatically to help dehumidify the air.
The heater works best if the windows are kept closed.
h (Recirculation): Press the button to turn on
the recirculation mode. The air inside the vehicle
recirculates through the climate control system and the
vehicle, not from outside the vehicle. This mode is
helpful when trying to limit odors from entering
the vehicle and for maximum air conditioning
performance in hot weather. When the button is
N (Hybrid Air Conditioning): This setting balances
fuel economy and air conditioning comfort. When
hybrid A/C is used in warm weather, you may notice
more frequent auto stops and the cabin may be warmer
as compared to normal air conditioning.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum Air Conditioning
Defogging and Defrosting
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass.
This can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to choose from
to clear fog or frost from the windshield. Use the defog
mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and
warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove
fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the C vent mode.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Select # air conditioning.
-(Defog): Turn the mode knob to this position to
select the defog setting, which delivers air to the floor
and windshield outlets. Use this setting to clear the
windows of fog or moisture.
4. Select the h recirculation mode.
5. Select the coolest temperature.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too dry.
To prevent this from happening, after the air in the vehicle
has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
0(Defrost): Turn the mode knob to this position to
defrost the windshield. The system automatically
controls the fan speed if defrost is selected from the
AUTO mode. If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or
warmer, the air conditioning compressor automatically
runs to help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield.
The air conditioning indicator light blinks three times
if the compressor is turned off while in this mode.
The engine will not perform Auto Stops when the defrost
mode is on.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
There are four main air outlets on the instrument panel.
Use the lever located in the center of each outlet by
moving it either side-to-side or up and down, to change
the direction and amount of airflow in the vehicle. The
center thumbwheel does not control the main outlets.
<(Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light above the
button comes on to show that the rear window defogger
is activated.
Rear Seat Air Outlet
If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window
defogger turns off about 15 minutes after the button is
pressed. If additional warming time is needed, press
the button again.
For vehicles with this feature, the rear seat air outlet is
located in the center of the instrument panel above
the two main center outlets.
Use the thumbwheel in the center of the outlet to turn
the airflow on or off. The horizontal vent vane does
not move.
If the vehicle’s speed is maintained above 50 mph
(80 km/h), the rear window defogger remains on
once the button is pressed.
Operation Tips
If your vehicle has heated outside mirrors, the
surface of the outside mirrors also heat when the rear
window defogger is activated. See Outside Power
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that can
block the flow of air into the vehicle.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
• Do not use non-GM approved hood deflectors as
they could adversely affect the performance of
the system.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning lights come on when there could be or there
is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they are working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle
more effectively.
• When an objectionable odor outside the vehicle is
encountered, use the recirculation mode, with the
temperature knob at a comfortable setting to prevent
the odor from entering the vehicle through the
ventilation system. This can be helpful when
driving through a long tunnel with poor ventilation.
However, extended usage of this mode in cold
or cool weather can cause window fogging.
Gages can indicate when there could be or there is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
gages and warning lights work together to let you know
when there is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays
on when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section that
tells you what to do about it. Follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and
even dangerous. Get to know your warning lights and
gages. They are a big help.
Warning Lights, Gages,
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how fast
you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to drive safely and economically.
Your vehicle has this instrument panel cluster, which includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained on
the following pages.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in miles
per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). See
information.
The trip odometer can tell you how far you have driven
since you last reset it.
The trip odometer is accessed and reset through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation and
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Tachometer
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. The
digital odometer will read 999,999 if someone tries to
turn it back.
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Your vehicle has auto stop and the indicator for this is
on the tachometer. For more information see Auto
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must
be. But if it can’t, then it is set at zero and a label must
be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Safety Belt Reminders
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
will sound for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would only
occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
The passenger safety belt light, located on the
instrument panel, will come on and stay on for
several seconds and then flash for several more.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime will come on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will
come on.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{CAUTION:
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds
when you start the engine. If the light does not come on
then, have it fixed immediately. If there is a problem with
the airbag system, an airbag Driver Information Center
(DIC) message may also come on. See DIC Warnings
The light should go out
and the system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start
the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag are enabled (may inflate).
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. Do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat if the airbag is turned on.
United States
Canada
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. If you
use remote start to start your vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped) if the system detects
a rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
We recommend that rear-facing child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag
is or airbags are off.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-29 for more on this, including
important safety information.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag.
on this, including important safety information.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
This light will come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition key, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show
you it is working.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system Driver
Information Center (DIC) message may also appear.
for more information. This light could indicate that
there are problems with a generator drive belt, or that
there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all the accessories, such as
the radio and air conditioner.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there
is a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does
not release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake
is fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display a
BRAKE FLUID message. See DIC Warnings and
Antilock Brake System
Warning Light
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the
pedal is harder to push or the pedal may go closer to
the floor. It may take longer to stop. Try turning off and
restarting the vehicle one or two times, if the light is
still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
This light will come
on briefly when you
start the engine.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
{CAUTION:
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
not have antilock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have antilock
brakes and there is a problem with your regular brakes.
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning
light on can lead to an accident. If the light
is still on after you have pulled off the road
and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
for service.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
all brake related DIC messages.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this light is on and not flashing, the TCS and
potentially the ESC system have been disabled. Check
your DIC messaging to determine which feature(s) is
no longer functioning and whether it is because of
the driver turning off the feature(s), or the system may
not be working properly and your vehicle requires
service. If the TCS is disabled, wheel spin will not be
limited. If the ESC system is disabled, the system
will not aid in maintaining vehicle directional control.
In either case, adjust your driving accordingly.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light
This light is located
in the center of the
instrument panel cluster.
If the light is on and flashing, the TCS or the ESC
system is actively working. Check the DIC messaging
for details to determine which system is working.
If the LOW TRACTION message appears, the system
is limiting wheel spin. If the ESC ACTIVE message
appears, the system is aiding in maintaining vehicle
directional control.
For vehicles that have the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system or the Traction Control System (TCS),
this warning light should come on briefly when the
engine is started.
information.
If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
This light, along with the appropriate Driver Information
Center (DIC) messages, indicates when the ESC
system and the TCS are working or are disabled.
more information on the messages associated with
this light.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Tire Pressure Light
Your vehicle has a
tire pressure light.
This light indicates
that the engine coolant
has overheated or
the radiator cooling
fan is not working.
This light comes on briefly when the engine is started
and provides information about tire pressures and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
This light will come on briefly when you turn on the
ignition as a check to show you it is working.
When the Light is Solid
If the light comes on and the vehicle has been operating
under normal driving conditions, pull off the road, stop
the vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
This indicates that one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC
information. Stop and check your tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The check engine light
comes on to indicate
that there is an OBD II
problem and service
is required.
When the Light Flashes First and
Then is Solid
This indicates that there may be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes
for about a minute and stays on solid for the remainder
of the ignition cycle. This sequence will repeat with
every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-53 for more information.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any
malfunction.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It makes sure that emissions are at acceptable
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce
a cleaner environment.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls might
not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might
not be covered by your warranty.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories and
If the Light is Flashing
The following can prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see
“If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is
still flashing, follow the previous steps and see your
dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
This light comes on, as a check to show it is working,
when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN but the engine
is not running. If the light does not come on, have
it repaired. This light also comes on during a malfunction
in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system
on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might
be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If the Light Is On Steady
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have developed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. The
condition is usually corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
This light will come on briefly when you turn on the
ignition as a check to show you it is working. If it does
not come on with the ignition on, you may have a
problem with the bulb. Have it fixed right away.
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced the battery or if the battery
has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during normal
driving. This can take several days of routine driving. If
you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your
dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Oil Pressure Light
If your vehicle has low
engine oil pressure, this
light will stay on after
you start your engine,
or come on and you will
hear a chime when you
are driving.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving enough
oil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security Light
Highbeam On Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
on page 2-15.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
for more information.
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set
the cruise control.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
These are normal and do not indicate a problem with
your fuel gage:
Fuel Gage
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity
to fill the tank.
• The indicator moves a little when you turn a corner
or speed up.
United States
Canada
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off
the ignition.
Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you
have left, when the ignition is on. When the indicator
nears empty, a LOW FUEL message will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings
You still have a little fuel left, but you should get more
soon. The arrow on the fuel gage points to side of
the vehicle with the fuel door.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Stop Mode
Charge/Assist Gage
The charge/assist gage
displays the charge into
and out of the battery.
United States
Canada
This mark on the tachometer shows that the engine
is in Auto Stop mode which is a fuel saving operation.
When the ignition key is turned off, the tachometer
needle will drop to OFF. If the driver’s door is opened
while in Auto Stop, a chime will sound.
When the electric motor is assisting the engine as in a
maximum acceleration, the needle will move to the
Assist range. When the electric motor operates as a
generator to perform regenerative braking while
decelerating, the needle will move to the Charge range.
information. The needle will also move into the Charge
region if the hybrid control system deems it is an
efficient time to charge the hybrid battery. This may
occur when the vehicle is coasting. If the hybrid battery
or other hybrid components are very hot or cold, the
Charge and Assist functions may be suspended until the
component temperatures are normal.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Economy Light
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC display gives you the status of many of your
vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display
driver personalization menu modes and warning/status
messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display,
located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.
If enabled, this light will
come on briefly when the
vehicle is started.
The DIC buttons are
located on the left side
of the steering wheel.
This light will also come on when the vehicle is operating
at a fuel efficient point.
This light can be disabled by using the Driver
Information Center (DIC) buttons. With the engine off
and the key turned to ACC/ACCESSORY, set the DIC
to the outside air temperature and odometer mode.
Press and hold the reset button for several seconds.
The light will come on solid and then flash several
times and turn off to indicate it is disabled. Repeat
the procedure to enable the light. See DIC Warnings
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the vehicle information mode displays.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
page 3-51.
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle
information mode displays, select a personalization menu
mode setting, or acknowledge a warning message.
TRIP A or TRIP B
Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the
same time for one second, then release the buttons
to enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
Press the information button until TRIP A or TRIP B
display. These modes show the current distance
traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both odometers
can be used at the same time.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has
different modes which can be accessed by pressing the
DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in the
following.
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold the
reset button for a few seconds while the desired
trip odometer is displayed.
FUEL RANGE
Information Modes
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE
displays. This mode shows the remaining distance
you can drive without refueling in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). It is based on fuel economy and the fuel
remaining in the tank.
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the following vehicle information modes:
Outside Air Temperature and Odometer
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature and the odometer display. This mode shows
the temperature outside of the vehicle in either degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C) and the total
distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km). The outside air temperature appears
on the left side of the DIC display and the odometer
appears on the right side of the display.
When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW displays.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range
is an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)
AV (Average) SPEED
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) AVG
displays. This mode shows how many miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your
vehicle is getting based on current and past driving
conditions.
Press the information button until AV SPEED displays.
This mode shows the vehicle’s average speed in
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
To reset the average vehicle speed, press and hold the
reset button while AV SPEED is displayed.
To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold the
reset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is displayed.
Average fuel economy is then calculated starting
from that point. If the average fuel economy is not reset,
it is continually updated each time you drive.
OIL LIFE
Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’s
remaining useful life. It shows 100% when the system
is reset after an oil change. It alerts you to change the oil
on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous)
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) INST
displays. This mode shows the current fuel economy
at a particular moment and changes frequently as
driving conditions change. This mode shows the
instantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg)
or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average
fuel economy, this screen cannot be reset.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil
life, additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine Oil
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”
Under most coast conditions or at an idle stop,
AUTOSTOP displays. This means that the electric
motor is on, the gas engine is off, and the engine is
not using any fuel.
COOLANT
Press the information button until COOLANT displays.
This mode shows the temperature of the engine coolant
in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Pressure
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC.
The tire pressure is shown in either pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the information
button until LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF displays for the front
tires. Press the information button again until
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is disabled with the headlamp switch. See
information.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON
LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for the rear tires.
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is enabled with the headlamp switch. See
information.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the system
while driving, a message advising you to check the
tire pressure appears in the display. See Inflation - Tire
BRAKE FLUID
This message displays, while the ignition is on, when
the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning
light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on.
information. Have the brake system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
DIC Warnings and Messages
These messages appear if there is a problem detected
in one of your vehicle’s systems.
A message clears when the vehicle’s condition is no
longer present. To acknowledge a message and clear
it from the display, press and hold any of the DIC
buttons. If the condition is still present, the warning
message comes back on the next time the vehicle
is turned off and back on. With most messages,
a warning chime sounds when the message displays.
Your vehicle may have other warning messages.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHANGE OIL SOON
CRUISE ENGAGED
This message displays when the life of the engine oil
has expired and it should be changed.
This message displays when the cruise control system
information.
When this message is acknowledged and cleared from
the display, the engine oil life system must still be
for more information.
DOOR AJAR
This message displays if one or more of the vehicle’s
doors are not closed properly. Make sure that the
door(s) are closed completely.
CHECK GAS CAP
ENGINE DISABLED
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been
fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure
that it is on properly. A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the message off.
This message displays if the starting of the engine is
disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED
CHECK TIRE PRESS (Pressure)
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine power
is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed
to your destination. The performance may be reduced
the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may
be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken
to your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
This message displays when the pressure in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. If a tire
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon
as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to
those shown on the Tire Loading Information label.
The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See
pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning light
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE
HOOD AJAR
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on
the instrument panel cluster flashes when ESC is
assisting you with directional control of the vehicle.
You may feel or hear the system working and see this
message displayed in the DIC. Slippery road conditions
may exist when this message is displayed, so adjust
your driving accordingly. This message may stay on for
a few seconds after ESC stops assisting you with
directional control of the vehicle. This is normal when
the system is operating. See Electronic Stability Control
This message displays if the hood is not fully closed.
Make sure that the hood is closed completely. The
vehicle will not auto stop when the hood is ajar.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW
This message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery
in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under
on page 2-4.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF
LOW FUEL
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on
the instrument panel cluster comes on solid when
ESC is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-34
for more information.
This message displays when your vehicle is low on
fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOW TRACTION
SERVICE AIR BAG
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on
the instrument panel cluster flashes when the system
is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions
may exist if this message is displayed, so adjust
your driving accordingly. This message stays on for a
few seconds after the system stops limiting wheel spin.
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-34
for more information.
This message displays when there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY
CONTROL)
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and a chime sounds if there has
been a problem detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This
light stays on solid as long as the detected problem
remains present. When this message displays, the
system is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-34
for more information.
LOW WASHER FLUID
This message displays when the vehicle’s windshield
washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid
reservoir to the proper level as soon as possible.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull
off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and
then back on. If this message still stays on or turns
back on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs
service. Have the ESC inspected by your dealer/retailer
as soon as possible.
POWER STEERING
This message displays if a problem has been detected
with the electric power steering. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.
PUSH PARK PEDAL
This message displays if the parking brake is left
more information.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE HYBRID
SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR
This message displays if the hybrid components need
to be serviced. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
page 3-35. Several conditions may cause this message
page 5-55 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE TRACTION
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays and a chime sounds when
the system is not functioning properly. The ESC/TCS
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster.
This light stays on solid as long as the detected problem
remains present. When this message displays, the
system is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-34
for more information. Have the system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
TRACTION OFF
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on
the instrument panel cluster comes on solid when the
system is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-34
for more information.
SRVC (Service) HILL START
This message displays if there is a problem with the
hill start assist function. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
TRUNK AJAR
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
information.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Personalization Menu Modes
OIL LIFE RESET
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the engine
oil life system. To reset the system, see Engine Oil Life
information.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to a preferred setting.
All of the features listed may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the features available will be
displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the features were set when your
vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed from
their default state since that time.
UNITS
This feature allows you to select the units of
measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle
information. When UNITS appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings:
To change feature settings, use the following procedure:
Entering Personalization Menu
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
ENGLISH (default in United States): All information
will be displayed in English units.
2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons at
the same time for one second, then release to enter
the personalization menu.
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will be
displayed in metric units.
If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h),
only the UNITS menu will be accessible.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes.
Press the reset button to scroll through the available
settings for each mode.
If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,
the display will go back to the previous information
displayed.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCK HORN
UNLOCK HORN
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp
every time the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.
When LOCK HORN appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings:
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp on
the first press of the unlock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, can be enabled or disabled.
When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings:
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The horn
will still chirp on the second press.
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the lock
button on the RKE transmitter.
button on the RKE transmitter.
on page 2-4 for more information.
on page 2-4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIGHT FLASH
DELAY LOCK
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior
hazard/turn signal lighting to flash every time the lock,
unlock, or trunk release buttons on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter are pressed, can be enabled
or disabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears on the
display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAY
LOCK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the power lock
switch or the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter a second time.
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will
not flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons
on the RKE transmitter are pressed.
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting
will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons
on the RKE transmitter are pressed.
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when pressing
the power lock switch or the lock button on the
RKE transmitter.
on page 2-4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)
UNLK (Unlock)
This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically
unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. When
AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and hold
the reset button for at least one second to scroll through
the available settings:
This screen displays only if DRIVER or ALL is selected
for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines
when the automatic door unlocking will occur. When
UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key is
turned off.
DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically unlock.
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
You will need to manually unlock the doors.
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
for more information.
for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS
LANGUAGE
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior
perimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlock button
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
pressed, can be enabled or disabled. When EXT
LIGHTS appears on the display, press and hold the
reset button for at least one second to scroll through
the available settings:
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE appears on
the display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.
SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.
GERMAN: All messages will appear in German.
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn
on when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter
is pressed.
To select a setting and exit out of the personalization
menu mode, press the information button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
on page 2-4 for more information.
Exiting Personalization Menu
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
The personalization menu will be exited when any of
the following conditions occur:
• A ten second time period has elapsed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The end of the personalization menu list is reached.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While your vehicle is parked:
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound equipment
can be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other
systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s
systems may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction
while driving.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See
more information.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The date does not automatically display. To see the
Setting the Clock
date press the H (clock) button while the radio is
on. The date with display times out after a few seconds
and goes back to the normal radio and time display.
Your vehicle has a radio with a H (clock) button for
setting the time and date.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these
instructions:
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)
displays.
1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow label. Once
the time 12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY
(month, day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day,
month, and year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels to be changed. Every time the pushbutton is
pressed again, the time or the date if selected,
increases by one.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is to
press the right ¨SEEK arrow or \FWD
3. Press the H button again to apply the selected
(forward) button.
default, or let the screen time out.
• To decrease the time or date, press the left ©
SEEK arrow or sREV (reverse) button, or
turn the f knob, located on the upper right side
of the radio.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the
station name or call letters display. In rare cases,
a radio station can broadcast incorrect information
that causes the radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio station.
Radio(s)
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based
in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During your
trial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimited
access to XM™ Radio Online for when you are not
in your vehicle. A service fee is required to receive the
XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™
at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the
U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677
in Canada.
Radio with CD (MP3)
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies
upon receiving specific information from these stations
and only works when the information is available.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing the Radio
Finding a Station
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system
on and off.
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM,
or XM™ (if equipped).
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio
has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). When SCV
is on, the radio volume automatically adjusts to
compensate for road and wind noise as you speed
up or slow down while driving. That way, the volume
level should sound about the same as you drive.
To activate SCV:
©SEEK ¨: Press the arrows to go to the previous or
to the next station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
a few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to
a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3,
and RDS Features): Press to display additional
text information related to the current FM-RDS or
MP3 song. A choice of additional information such
as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category)
can appear. Continue pressing this button to highlight
the desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned
under any one of the labels and the information
about that label displays.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
label on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
While information is not available, No Info displays.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has this feature.
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency labels and
by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).
Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages
of favorites, each having six favorite stations available
per page. Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) stations.
To store a station as a favorite, perform the following
steps:
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out,
to return to the original main radio screen showing
the radio station frequency labels and to begin
the process of programming your favorites for the
chosen amount of numbered pages.
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where the
station is to be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released again, the station that was set,
returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio station you want
stored as a favorite.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select preset
equalization settings.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ button until
Manual displays or press the f knob to adjust the
bass, midrange, or treble.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob until
the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
positioned under the desired label. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. The highlighted setting can also be adjusted
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or
fade, press the f knob until the speaker control labels
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under
the desired label. Turn the f knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting.
The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing
by pressing either SEEK arrow, \FWD (forward) or
s REV (reverse) button until the desired levels
are obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak, or has
static, decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
either SEEK arrow, \FWD or sREV button until
the desired levels are obtained.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or
FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds
and the level adjusts to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed through
the setup menu. To remove an undesired category,
perform the following:
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM™
stations while the radio is in the XM™ mode. To find
XM™ channels within a desired category, perform
the following:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT
label.
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™ frequency
displays. Press the CAT button to display the
category labels. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
3. Turn the f knob to display the category you want
removed.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category label to immediately tune to the first
XM™ station associated with that category.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
label until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right
or left arrows displayed, or press the SEEK arrows
to go to the previous or to the next XM™ station
within the selected category.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed
category displays or by pressing the pushbutton under
the Restore All label.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays on
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
number displays.
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.
If Calibration Error displays, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your vehicle
and it must be returned to your dealer/retailer for
service.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Care of Your CDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. Handle them carefully.
Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The
CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the
surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole
and the outer edge.
Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. While the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Your CD Player
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current track, if more than ten seconds have
played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track.
If either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times,
the player continues moving backward or forward
through the tracks on the CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top
of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.
sREV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at
a reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt is
made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD
player could be damaged. While using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and
the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids,
and debris.
\FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the tracks can
be listened to in random, rather than sequential order.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
To use random, do one of the following:
Z EJECT: Press to eject a CD. To eject the CD that is
currently playing, press and release this button. A beep
sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is
ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.
If the CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD
automatically pulls back into the player and begins
playing.
• Press the CD/AUX button and insert a disc partway
into the slot of the CD player. The RDM label
displays.
• Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM
label until Random Current Disc displays.
• Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is playing.
The CD remains inside the radio for future listening.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing disc and/or track number displays when a CD is
in the player. Press again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable
audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
No Input Device Found displays.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer while reporting the problem.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Your radio system has a single CD (MP3) player,
it is capable of playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc.
For more information on how to play an MP3 CD-R
in this section.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located
on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not
an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the
front auxiliary input jack. However, an external audio
device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player,
CD changer, etc. can be connected to the auxiliary
input jack for use as another source for audio listening.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/or the CD
ejects, it could be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns
to normal, the CD should play.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with
the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and
320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name,
and album are available for display by the radio
when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume
of the portable player. Additional volume adjustments
can be made from the portable device if the volume
is not loud or soft enough.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing, so you might want to stop it or
turn it off.
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files.
By default the radio reads only the uncompressed
audio and ignore the MP3 files. Pressing the CAT
button toggles between compressed and uncompressed
audio format.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, No Input Device Found displays.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3 Format
• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to play
up to the maximum number of files, folders, playlists,
or sessions. If you wish to play a large number of
files, folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize the
length of the file, folder, or playlist name. Long
names also take up more space on the display,
potentially getting cut off.
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R
or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on one disc.
• The CD player is able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using
one folder for each album. Each folder or album
should contain 18 songs or less.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc not
to function in the player.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total number
of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the
complexity and confusion in trying to locate a
particular folder during playback.
Playlists can be changed by using the previous and
next folder buttons, the tune knob, or the SEEK arrows.
You can also play an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that was
recorded using no file folders. If a CD-R or CD-RW
contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, and 255 files, the player lets you access
and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over the
maximum are not accessible.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension
(other file extensions might not work).
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Root Directory
Order of Play
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Empty Directory or Folder
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first folder.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders
and no compressed files directly beneath them, the
player advances to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio files. The empty
folder does not display.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
The new track name displays.
No Folder
When a CD contains only compressed files, the files are
located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder function does not function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then go to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder the
radio displays ROOT.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. The display does not show parts of
words on the last page of text and the extension of the
filename does not display.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preprogrammed Playlists
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the
CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, there is no playlist editing
capability using the radio. These playlists are treated as
special folders containing compressed audio song files.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3 file, if more than 10 seconds
have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to
the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held or
pressed multiple times, the player continues moving
backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot, label
side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW
should begin playing.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD-R or
CD-RW is in the player, it stays in the player. When
the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R or CD-RW
starts to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
c T(Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
sREV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the
file displays.
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW
that is currently playing, press and release this button.
A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once
the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R
or CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW
is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R
or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player
and begins playing.
\FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button
to advance playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound
is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3 files on
the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order. To play MP3 files from a
CD-R or CD-RW in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Random Current
Disc displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn
off random play.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album,
press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label.
From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the
album button. Press the pushbutton below the back label
to return to the main music navigator screen. Now the
album name is displayed on the second line between the
arrows and songs from the current album begins to play.
Once all songs from that album are played, the player
moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the
CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3 files from
that album.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order
by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below
the music navigator label. The player scans the disc to
sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It
can take several minutes to scan the disc depending on
the number of MP3 files recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.
The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc
in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R
or CD-RW begins playing again.
To exit the music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio while a
CD is playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio
for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon and
a message showing disc and/or track number displays
while a CD is in the player. Press this button again
and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary
input device such as a portable audio player. If a
portable audio player is not connected, No Input
Device Found displays.
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to playing
MP3 files in order by artist. The current artist playing is
shown on the second line of the display between the
arrows. Once all songs by that artist are played, the
player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order on
the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3 files by that
artist. To listen to MP3 files by another artist, press the
pushbutton located below either arrow button. The disc
goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order.
Continue pressing either button until the desired artist
displays.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM TheftLocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle could
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message appears after having your
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When you move into an open area, the signal
should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM Radio eight digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune to another channel.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult with
your dealer/retailer.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station
was one of the presets, choose another station for that
preset button.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear within
a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Title Info: No song title information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working properly.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus button to
Theft-Deterrent Feature
increase or to decrease the volume.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it does not operate and LOC, LOCK, or
LOCKED could display.
wx (Previous/Next): Press the arrows to go to the
previous or to the next stored radio station and stay
there. Press and hold the arrows briefly to advance to
the previous or to the next station with a strong signal in
the selected band.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
When a CD is playing, press the arrows to go to the
previous or to the next track. Press and hold the arrows
briefly to continue reversing back or advancing ahead
to other tracks within the disc.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
g (Mute/Voice Activation): Press this button to
silence the system. Press this button again to turn the
sound on. If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and
hold this button for two seconds to activate voice on
page 2-35 in this manual for more information.
Radio controls are
located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
If your vehicle has
this feature, some audio
controls can be adjusted
at this location. They
include the following:
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM Stereo
Radio Reception
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals only
reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings
or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out.
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or through tunnels could cause loss
of the XM signal for a period of time. The radio may
display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other.
For better radio reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur
when things like storms and power lines interfere with
radio reception. When this happens, try reducing
the treble on your radio.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If adding a cellular telephone to your vehicle, and the
antenna needs to be attached to the glass, make
sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM antenna are not
damaged. There is enough space between the grid lines
to attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering
with radio reception.
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the grid lines on the glass are not damaged.
If the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere
with radio reception.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window may damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear window defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp
objects.
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the
roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow
and ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window
defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger
grid line has been damaged. If this is true, the grid line
must be repaired.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness,
and judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who
has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are
{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision,
and attentiveness.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Braking
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second.
But that is only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination,
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second, a
vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet
(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so keeping enough space between your vehicle and
others is important.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the
engine stops, you will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the
power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
an advanced electronic braking system that will
help prevent a braking skid.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between
hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster if you do
a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic
and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a
lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and
you might even notice that the brake pedal moves
a little. This is normal.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light will
stay on. See Antilock
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Using ABS
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might hear
the antilock pump or motor operate, and feel the
brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When this light is on solid
and either the SERVICE
TRACTION or TRACTION
OFF message is
displayed, the system will
not limit wheel spin.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that the front wheels are spinning too much
or are beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power by closing the throttle and managing engine spark
to limit wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and
This light will flash when
your traction control
system is limiting
wheel spin.
The Traction Control System is automatically enabled
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system enabled. You can turn TCS
off if you ever need to.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,
ice or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle
to attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off
the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when TCS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn the system off or
on, press and release this
button located on the
instrument panel.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel(s)
excessively while these lights and this message
are displayed.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, it is
possible to lose traction. If you attempt to shift with
the front wheels spinning with a loss of traction,
it is possible to cause damage to the transmission.
Do not attempt to shift when the front wheels do
not have traction. Damage caused by misuse of the
vehicle is not covered. See your warranty book
for additional information.
The DIC will display the appropriate message as
described previously when you press the button.
Traction Control Operation
Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine
power to the wheels (engine speed management)
and by applying brakes to each individual wheel
(brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, you may
notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise
or vibration. This is normal.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when you start your vehicle, and it will activate and flash
the ESC/TCS light and display the LOW TRACTION
message if it senses either of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving. For
more information on the LOW TRACTION message,
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to use cruise control again,
you may re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle
to spin excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and
Brake warning lights and the SERVICE ESC
and/or SERVICE TRACTION messages are
displayed, you could damage the differential.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light will flash on the
instrument panel cluster
when the ESC system
is both on and activated.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Your vehicle may have an Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system which combines antilock brake,
traction and stability control systems and helps the
driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in
most driving conditions.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive away,
the system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure
there are no problems. You may hear or feel the system
working. This is normal and does not mean there is a
problem with your vehicle. The system should initialize
before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
You may also feel or hear the system working; this
is normal.
When the light is on solid and either the SERVICE ESC
or ESC OFF message is displayed, the system will
not assist the driver in maintaining directional control of
the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS
light will be on solid, and the ESC OFF or SERVICE
ESC message will be displayed.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is
automatically enabled whenever you start your vehicle.
To assist the driver with vehicle directional control,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should always
leave the system on. But, you can turn ESC off if you
ever need to.
For more information, see Driver Information
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system
begins to assist the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the
cruise control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control
on page 3-10.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,
ice or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle
to attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off
the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle
The ESC/TCS button
is located on the
center console.
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that
a problem exists with the system. The ESC OFF and
SERVICE ESC messages and the ESC/TCS light will
be on solid to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and
requires service. If the problem does not clear after
restarting the vehicle, you should see your dealer/retailer
page 3-46 for more information.
The traction control system can be turned off or back on
by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both traction
control and ESC, press and hold the button briefly.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION
OFF and ESC OFF messages will appear, and
the ESC/TCS light will be on solid to warn the driver
that both traction control and ESC are disabled.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going
in the same direction. If you have ever tried to steer
a vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
Steering
If the engine stalls while you are driving, the power
steering assist system will continue to operate until you
are able to stop your vehicle. If you lose power steering
assist because the electric power steering system is not
functioning, you can steer, but it will take more effort.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time,
you may notice a reduced amount of power steering
assist. The normal amount of power steering assist
should return shortly after a few normal steering
movements.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Traction Control
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems, contact your dealer/retailer for service repairs.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Steering Tips
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the
front wheels are straight ahead.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface
makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path
when you turn the front wheels.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly
pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right in front of you.
You can avoid these problems by braking — if you
can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is
not room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel
at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a
possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
we suggest the following tips:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up
to one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to
go straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area
of less danger.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid
only the acceleration skid. If your traction control system
is off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Driving at Night
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns
or curves.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
• Slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles because your headlamps
can only light up so much road ahead.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
• Watch for animals.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
{CAUTION:
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up
under your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough
and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
• Allow extra following distance.
• Pass with caution.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
Other driving tips include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full?
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
Windows clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
Hill and Mountain Roads
Have up-to-date maps?
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
{CAUTION:
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
{CAUTION:
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies
in your trunk.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles.
And, if you will be driving under severe conditions,
include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet,
or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction.
Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can get wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C),
and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and the
road, you can have a very slippery situation. You have a
lot less traction, or grip, and need to be very careful.
If you have the Traction Control System (TCS), it will
improve your ability to accelerate when driving on
a slippery road. But you can turn the TCS off if you
ever need to. You should turn the TCS off if your
vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
on page 4-21. Even if you have TCS, slow down and
adjust your driving to the road conditions. Under certain
conditions, you might want to turn the TCS off, such
as when driving through deep snow and loose gravel,
to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice.
Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to
drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble
because it can offer the least traction of all.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and
your passengers safe:
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while
you are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot
see it or smell it, so you might not know it
is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially
any that is blocking the exhaust pipe. And
check around again from time to time to be
sure snow does not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of
the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with the headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help
to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too
severe for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn
the traction system off and use the rocking method.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can.
To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle
and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour
or so until help comes.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear
the area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction
or stability system. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-8. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear,
wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift,
and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when
the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the
wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will
cause a rocking motion that could free your vehicle.
If that does not get your vehicle out after a few tries,
it might need to be towed out. If your vehicle does
need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle
on page 4-27.
It is very important to know how much weight
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Vehicle
Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation, see
on page 5-52.
Tire and Loading Information Label
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s
placard.
Label Example
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The Tire and Loading Information label lists the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and
the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
Example 1
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to
tow a trailer.
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs
1,000 lbs
A
A
(453 kg)
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
Available Cargo
Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification Label
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is found
on the rear edge of the driver’s door.
If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else are put inside the vehicle, they will
go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they
will keep going.
The label shows the gross weight capacity of
your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
either the front or rear axle.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing
{CAUTION:
Towing Your Vehicle
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
In a trunk, put them as far forward
as you can. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops
of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing, towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground, and dolly towing,
towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a dolly.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-16.
You may dinghy tow your vehicle from the front following
these steps:
1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it.
2. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
3. Set the parking brake.
Dinghy Towing
When dinghy towing, the vehicle should be run at the
beginning of each day and at each RV fuel stop for
about five minutes. This will ensure proper lubrication of
transmission components.
4. To prevent the battery from draining while the vehicle
is being towed, remove the following fuse from the
instrument panel fuse block: (IGN SENSOR). See
information.
5. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Shift your transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
7. Release the parking brake.
Dolly Towing
To tow your vehicle with two wheels on the ground
and a dolly:
Remember to reinstall the IGN SENSOR fuse once you
have reached your destination.
Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing your vehicle.
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the gear shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the
ignition key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.
5. Release the parking brake.
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Never have your vehicle towed
from the rear.
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to
tow a trailer.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine Saturn parts and Saturn-trained
and supported service people.
Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your
GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories,
you will know that GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine
GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids,
and some component wear by-products contain
and/or emit these chemicals.
{CAUTION:
Never try to do your own service on hybrid
components. You can be injured and your
vehicle can be damaged if you try to do your
own service work. Service and repair of these
hybrid components should only be performed
by a trained service technician with the proper
knowledge and tools.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless entry transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
{CAUTION:
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and
list the mileage and the date of any service work
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This can cause
wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield
washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Specifications
Fuel
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use of gasolines
additional information.
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking,
the engine needs service.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards,
your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance might be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might fail
a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-36. If this occurs, return to your authorized
dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by your warranty.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for
low emissions can contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
We recommend against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark
plugs and the performance of the emission control
system could be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp might turn on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles
that were not designed for those fuels.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling the Tank
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be
hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other
fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.
Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would
not be covered by your warranty.
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries
to you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club,
or contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The fuel door is located on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
To open the fuel door, apply pressure on the center of
the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open.
To remove the tethered fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
the CHECK GAS CAP message displays if the
fuel cap is not properly installed.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the
fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
get the right type. Your dealer/ retailer can get
one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
fit properly. This may cause your malfunction
indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel
tank and emissions system. See Malfunction
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping the fuel before removing the nozzle. Clean
fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the clockwise
until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is
in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge
from the container can ignite the fuel vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury
to you and others:
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer
and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
handle with this symbol
on it. It is located
inside the vehicle
to the left of the
steering column.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the
secondary hood release handle toward the driver
side of the vehicle.
3. Lift the hood.
4. After the hood is slightly lifted, it will continue to
open to the full position. Before closing the hood,
be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Lower the
hood until the lifting force of the strut is reduced,
then release the hood to latch fully. Check to make
sure the hood is closed and repeat the process
if necessary.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” under
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
on page 5-22.
F. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See ″Brake Fluid″
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down and check the level.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-32.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview on page 5-14
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, add at least
one quart/liter of the recommended oil. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
page 5-95.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere
in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all
the way back in when you are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,
the engine could be damaged.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for this information on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Look for three things:
• GM6094M
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting
GM Standard GM6094M. Look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30
is best for your vehicle.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier
cold starting and better protection for the engine at
extremely low temperatures.
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change
is necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message will
page 3-46. Change the oil as soon as possible within
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the
oil life system might not indicate that an oil change
is necessary for over a year. However, the engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be reset. Your
dealer/retailer has trained service people who will
perform this work using genuine parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check the oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you need for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not
on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage
at which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so
it can calculate when the next oil change is required.
If a situation occurs where you change the oil prior
to a CHANGE OIL SOON message being turned on,
reset the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting
it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have
a problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling
center for help.
After changing the engine oil and filter, the system
must be reset. To reset the oil life system:
1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three
times within five seconds.
If the message is not displayed, the system is reset.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back
on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,
do the following:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
1. Remove the spring clamps that hold the cover on.
2. Lift off the cover.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you are driving.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Align the filter correctly using the alignment tab.
5. Install the cover by guiding the tabs on the rim
of the top cover into the bottom hinges and turn
the cover down to close it.
6. The spring clips will engage easily, if the cover
is properly seated.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-26.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
dealer/retailer and have it repaired as soon as possible.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work
as they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you
do not need to add anything else.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
more information on location.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn
you badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
FULL COLD mark or slightly higher.
The engine coolant surge tank is located in the rear
of the engine compartment.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
Pressure Cap
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool. If the surge tank is empty, a special fill
procedure is necessary. See Engine Overheating
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
more information on location.
{CAUTION:
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Overheating
CAUTION: (Continued)
There is an engine coolant temperature warning light on
your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
information.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of
the vehicle until the engine is cool.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not
be covered by your warranty.
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and
get everyone away from the vehicle until it
cools down. Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you open the hood.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the overheat warning is no longer on, you can drive.
Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
An overheat warning, can indicate a serious problem.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes parked. If the warning is still there,
turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle
until it cools down.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
{CAUTION:
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD
mark on the front of the coolant surge tank. If it is not,
you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the
radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump,
or somewhere else in the cooling system.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank
C. Pressure Cap
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could
be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank,
but be sure the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but
you would not get the overheat warning. The
engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. Remove the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling
system, including
the coolant surge tank
pressure cap and
upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about two or two and one-half turns. If you hear a
hiss, wait for that to stop. This allows any pressure
still left to be vented out the discharge hose.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture, to
the FULL COLD mark on the front of the surge tank.
Wait about five minutes, then check to see if the level
is below the FULL COLD mark. If the level is below
the FULL COLD mark, add additional coolant to bring
the level up to the mark. Repeat this procedure until
the level remains constant at the FULL COLD mark
for at least five minutes.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against freezing.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
Adding Washer Fluid
When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,
a LOW WASHER FLUID message displays on
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower than
the FULL COLD mark, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level
reaches the FULL COLD mark.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
on page 5-14 for reservoir
location.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
See your dealer/retailer, if necessary.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
{CAUTION:
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a
brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or
lightly applied. This does not mean something is
wrong with the brakes.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel
nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications
Brakes
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard
all the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are
pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Pedal Travel
Battery
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
{CAUTION:
Brake Adjustment
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt
page 5-36 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for
the worse. The braking performance you have come
to expect can change in many other ways if someone
puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Your vehicle has a standard 12-volt battery and a
36-volt hybrid battery system.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember to reconnect the battery when you are
ready to drive your vehicle.
12-Volt Battery
When it is time for a new standard 12-volt battery, see
your dealer/retailer for one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label.
Notice: The 36-volt hybrid battery system should
be serviced only by a qualified facility to avoid
battery system damage. See your dealer/retailer
if service is needed.
36-Volt Battery System
Notice: If the vehicle is not driven for over
two months, the 36-volt hybrid battery can be
permanently damaged.
If you need a new 36-volt hybrid battery system,
see your dealer/retailer.
Vehicle Storage
The 36-volt battery is located behind the rear seat,
in the trunk. If the vehicle is stored for an extended
period of time, drive the vehicle every two months for
about half an hour to keep the 36-volt hybrid battery
charged and in good working condition.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the 12-volt battery black, negative (−) cable,
the one that is exposed. This will help keep the battery
from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your
vehicle, remove the 12-volt battery black, negative (−)
cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.
This will help maintain the charge of the battery over
an extended period of time.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be
able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. Your vehicle’s positive (+) terminal is
located under a red tethered cap on the battery.
The negative (–) terminal is located under a
black tethered cap on the battery. See Engine
information on location. Flip the caps up to access
the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (–) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (–) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash,
the headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment
to the low-beam headlamps may be necessary if
oncoming drivers flash their high-beam headlamps
at you (for vertical aim).
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
5. Return the caps over the positive (+) and
negative (–) terminals to their original positions.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in
this section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You
or others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
A. Turn Signal Lamp
B. Stoplamp/Taillamp
C. Backup Lamp
D. Sidemarker Lamp
If a stoplamp or a taillamp needs to be replaced,
see your dealer/retailer.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace a sidemarker lamp, turn signal lamp,
or a back-up lamp:
5. Remove the taillamp assembly.
6. Remove the wiring harness from the taillamp
assembly by lifting the release tab.
more information.
7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it.
8. Pull the bulb from the socket.
2. Remove the convenience net, if the vehicle
has one.
9. Install a new bulb.
3. Remove the wing nuts holding the trunk trim.
10. Reverse Steps 2 through 6 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
4. Remove the three wing nuts, which hold the
taillamp assembly, from inside the vehicle.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull
the bulb straight out of the socket.
License Plate Lamp
To replace the license plate lamp bulb:
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the lamp
assembly.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Bulb Number
921
License Plate Lamp and
Rear Sidemarker Lamp
168
Turn Signal Lamp
3156
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
1. Remove the two screws holding the license plate
lamp assembly to the fascia.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the fascia opening.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
wear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for more information on wiper blade
inspection.
To remove the wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector
away from the windshield.
2. Push the release button.
3. Slide the blade forward.
4. Rotate the blade toward you and continue
to slide forward.
5. Install the new blade onto the arm connector
and make sure the grooved areas are fully set
in the locked position.
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked
when your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when
you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or
if your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the Tire Size
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustration is an example
of a typical P-Metric tire sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT code are the
Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows, an example of,
a typical passenger car tire size.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.
For more information, see Uniform Tire Quality
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75,
as shown in item C, of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 75 percent as high
as it is wide.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used
to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread.
Cords may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a
tire. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-52.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle
with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-22.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings
are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire
and Loading Information Label” under Loading
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 5-59.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label,
you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling
and ride comfort. Never load your vehicle
with more weight than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
Check your tires once a month or more.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated even when
they are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you
reach the recommended amount.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out
dirt and moisture.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210
of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
additional information.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For additional information and details about the DIC
operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays
page 3-46.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and
wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the
air pressure in the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire
pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in
cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS turns on the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are
example of the Tire and Loading Information label and
its location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using
an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved tire
sealant available through your dealer/retailer.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light
and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can
be viewed by the driver.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message is
also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC warning
message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem
is corrected. Some of the conditions that can cause the
malfunction light and DIC message to come on are:
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this
section.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
need to be matched to the new tire/wheel location.
The sensors are matched, to the tire/wheel locations,
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the
tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure,
do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure
indicated on the tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s
air-pressure use the pointed end of the valve cap,
a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match
any tire and wheel position, the matching process stops
and you need to start over.
6. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side front tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
7. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
8. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
3. Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter’s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, at the
same time, for about five seconds to start the TPMS
learn mode. The horn sounds twice indicating the
TPMS receiver is ready and in learn mode.
9. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound
to indicate the tire learning process is done.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver side
front turn signal also comes on to indicate that
corner’s sensor is ready to be learned.
If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS learn
mode, or if communication with the receiver stops,
or if the time limit has expired, turn the ignition switch
to LOCK/OFF and start over beginning with Step 2.
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for about
eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to
30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then
all the turn signals flash one time to confirm
the sensor identification code has been matched
to the tire/wheel position.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires for signs of wear or damage.
for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
When rotating the vehicle’s tires, always use
the correct rotation pattern shown here.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
more information.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
front and rear inflation pressures as shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label. See
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One way to tell when
it is time for new tires
is to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts
to which it is fastened, can make wheel
nuts become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause a crash. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if you need to, to get all the rust
or dirt off.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.
When It Is Time for New Tires
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and
tire pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the
tire size. If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS, for
for additional information.
Buying New Tires
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This
is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the
tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
for information on proper tire rotation.
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires) the vehicle may
not handle properly, and you could have
a crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on your
vehicle’s wheels.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.
Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading
the Tire and Loading Information label and its location
on your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on your vehicle.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability,
and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes,
traction control, and stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use Saturn
specific wheel and tire systems developed
for your vehicle, and have them properly
installed by a Saturn certified technician.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing
will not be necessary on a regular basis. However,
if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling
to one side or the other, the alignment might need
to be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new Saturn
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure
to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire clearance to
the body and chassis.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or the
threads of the wheel nuts. If you do, the
wheel nuts might come loose and the wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause a crash. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become
loose and even come off. This could lead to a
crash. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.
If you have to replace them, be sure to get
new Saturn original equipment wheel nuts.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you have
to replace a wheel, use a new Saturn original
equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control
of your vehicle and you or others may be
injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if
its manufacturer recommends it for use on
your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and
do not spin your vehicle’s wheels. If you do
find traction devices that will fit, install them
on the front tires.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by
driving slowly to a level place and stopping. Then do this:
If a Tire Goes Flat
Your vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit.
There is no spare tire, no tire changing equipment,
and no place to store a tire.
2. Park your vehicle. Set the parking brake firmly and
put the shift lever in PARK (P). See Shifting Into
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. See
more likely to leak out slowly. But, if you should
ever have a blow out, here are a few tips about what
to expect and what to do:
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Inspect the flat tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has
damaged sidewalls, or has a puncture larger than a
1
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
⁄
4
inch (6 mm), the tire is too severely damaged for
the tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective.
1
If the tire has a puncture less than a ⁄4 inch (6 mm)
in the tread area of the tire, see Tire Sealant and
A rear blow out, particularly on a curve, acts much like
a skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blow out, remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer.
Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Your vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit
capable of sealing a small puncture up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm)
in the tread area of the tire. The kit inflates the tire with
liquid sealant and air. The tire sealant and compressor
kit can also be used to inflate an underinflated tire.
After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure,
must be driven for five miles, the tire pressure must be
rechecked and adjusted as needed. See Using the
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit later in this section.
Be sure to read and follow all of the tire sealant and
compressor kit instructions. The kit includes:
A. Air Compressor
E. Air Pressure Gage
B. Tire Sealant Canister F. Air Compressor
C. Air Compressor
Accessory Plug
Inflator Hose
G. Sealant Filling Hose
D. On/Off Switch
After temporarily repairing a tire using the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer/retailer as soon as possible. If the sealant is
removed within 100 miles (161 kilometers) of driving,
then it is easier to clean from the tire and you are
less likely to require a replacement tire.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the
sealant canister.
To access the tire sealant and compressor kit:
The sealant can temporarily seal a small puncture up
to ⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the tread area of the tire. The
sealant cannot seal sidewall damage, large punctures,
or a wheel that has unseated from the wheel. See
need assistance.
1
more information.
The sealant can only be used to seal one tire. After
usage, the sealant canister and sealant filling hose
assembly must be replaced at a dealer/retailer.
See Removal and Installation of Sealant Canister
later in this section.
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister, if it has expired, see your dealer/retailer
for a replacement.
2. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit by
turning the wing nut counterclockwise.
3. Remove the sealant and compressor kit from
its foam container.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit to Temporarily
Seal a Punctured Tire
Follow these directions closely for correct sealant usage.
1. Place the sealant and compressor kit on the ground
and unwrap the sealant filling hose from the
compressor.
2. Remove the air compressor accessory plug from
the unit. To do this, pull the top portion of the
wrapped cord out first, then the bottom, and then
unsnap the plug. Do not insert the plug into an
accessory outlet yet.
3. Remove the valve stem or tire pressure monitoring
sensor cap from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
If an object, such as a nail, has penetrated the tire,
do not remove it.
4. Attach the sealant filling hose (A) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
Make sure the sealant and compressor kit on/off
switch (B) is in the O (off) position.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C) into
an accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
for more information.
{CAUTION:
Do not slam door or close window on the
compressor accessory plug.
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine
7. Push the On/Off kit switch to the I (on) position.
The sealant and compressor kit injects sealant
and air into the tire. Sealant could leak from
the puncture hole until the vehicle is driven and
the hole has sealed.
The pressure gage will initially show a high pressure
while the compressor injects the sealant into the
tire. Once the sealant is completely dispersed into
the tire, the pressure will quickly dropped and
start to rise again as the tire inflates with air.
(Automatic Engine Start/Stop) on page 2-21
for more information. The vehicle must be
running while using the air compressor.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure, found on the Tire and Loading Information
label located on the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar)
below the vehicle’s door latch, using the air
pressure gage on the top of the unit.
12. Disconnect the sealant filling hose from the tire
valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and
replace the tire valve stem cap.
Be careful when handling the tire inflator
components as they could be hot after usage.
The pressure gage reads high while the compressor
is running. Turn the compressor off to get an
accurate pressure reading.
13. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
14. Stow the air compressor accessory plug back in the
air compressor. To do this, wrap the air compressor
accessory plug, snap in the plug, and then push
in the bottom and then the top of the wrapped
air compressor accessory plug.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after 15 minutes, the vehicle should not
be driven. The tire is too severely damaged
and cannot be inflated or sealed with the tire sealant
and compressor kit. Remove the air compressor
accessory plug from the accessory power outlet
and unscrew the sealant filling hose from the
tire valve or tire pressure monitoring sensor valve.
15. If the flat tire was
able to inflate to the
recommended inflation
pressure, remove
the maximum speed
label from the sealant
canister.
9. Push the On/Off switch to the O (off) position
once the correct tire pressure is obtained.
10. The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak
air until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is
distributed in the tire.
Steps 11 through 17 must be done right after
Step 10.
11. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug from
the accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
Place it in a highly visible location such as the
inside of the upper left corner of the windshield
or to the face of the radio/clock.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The maximum speed label reminds you to drive
cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
you have the damaged tire inspected and repaired.
{CAUTION:
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger compartment
of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment could strike
someone. Store the tire sealant and compressor
kit in the proper place.
17. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant evenly in the tire. Stop at a safe
location and check the tire pressure, refer to Steps 1
through 8 under “Using the Air Compressor without
Sealant” next in this section.
18. If the tire pressure has fallen more then
10 psi (68 kPa), below the recommended inflation
pressure, stop driving the vehicle. The tire is
too severely damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor cannot seal the tire. See Roadside
16. Return the equipment to the proper storage
location in the trunk of your vehicle. Turn the
wing nut clockwise to secure the tire sealant
and compressor kit.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, inflate the tire back up to the
recommended inflation pressure.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire or
vehicle with a rag.
20. Dispose of the sealant canister at a local
dealer/retailer or in accordance with local
state codes and practices.
After using the sealant canister, replace it with
a new canister from your dealer/retailer.
21. After temporarily sealing a tire with the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take your vehicle to your
dealer/retailer to have the tire inspected and
repaired.
Using the Air Compressor without
Sealant to Inflate an Underinflated Tire
(Not Punctured)
2. Unlock the air compressor hose from the sealant
canister by pulling up on the lever.
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
and not sealant:
3. Pull the air compressor inflator hose from the
sealant canister.
1. Remove the air compressor inflating hose connector
from the bottom of the air compressor.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the tire
valve stem and push the lever down to secure in
place.
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug into an
accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See Accessory
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Inflate the tire up to the recommended inflation
pressure using the air pressure gage on the top
of the unit.
{CAUTION:
9. Turn off the air compressor by moving the switch
to the O (off) position.
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine
The pressure gage reads high while the compressor
is running. Turn the compressor off to get an
accurate reading. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-52 for more information.
10. Disconnect the compressor inflator hose and
wrap the hose in the bottom of the sealant and
compressor kit.
(Automatic Engine Start/Stop) on page 2-21
for more information. The vehicle must be running
while using the air compressor.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Storing the tire sealant and compressor
kit or other equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could cause injury.
In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire sealant
and compressor kit in the proper place.
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
11. Place the equipment in the original location in
the trunk of your vehicle.
7. Push the sealant and compressor kit switch to
the I (on) position.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister
To remove the sealant canister:
4. Turn the sealant canister so the inflator filling hose
is aligned with the slot in the compressor.
1. Unlock the air compressor inflator hose from the
sealant canister by pulling the lever up.
5. Lift the sealant canister from the compressor and
replace with a new sealant canister. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
2. Disconnect the air compressor inflator hose from
the sealant canister.
3. Unwrap the sealant filling hose from the
compressor.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To install a new sealant canister:
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
1. Align the sealant filling hose with the slot in the
air compressor.
2. Push the sealant canister down and turn it
clockwise.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
3. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the
sealant canister inlet and push the lever down.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it
is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust
and dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve
the effectiveness of soil removal.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test
a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the
locally cleaned area gives any impression that a
ring formation may result, clean the entire surface.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
After the cleaning process has been completed,
a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never
use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are
sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of
your interior and are not recommended. Do not use
silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Washing Your Vehicle
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that
can damage the emblems or nameplates on
your vehicle. Check the cleaning product label.
If it states that it should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on your vehicle or damage may
occur and it would not be covered by the warranty.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a
car washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on your
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle
on page 5-80.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating
of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for
all bright metal parts.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys,
etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners
that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or
a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn
or damaged.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
• Heat and sun
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
Aluminum Wheels
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Cleans, shines,
and protects tires.
No wiping necessary.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans
and lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke, and fingerprints.
Removes spots and
stains from carpets, vinyl,
and cloth upholstery.
Spot Lifter
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels
and wire wheel covers.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather, and carpet.
Odor Eliminator
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and
surface contaminants.
Spray on wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacities
engine code.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
The label has the following information:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears
on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,
on the driver side. You can see it if you look through
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN
also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Electrical System
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats
due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the
motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem, have it fixed.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.
When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opens
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,
even if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible links. This greatly reduces the chance of
damage caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
to replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: one in
the center of the instrument panel, one in the engine
compartment and one in the trunk.
There is a fuse puller located on the instrument panel
fuse block. It can be used to easily remove fuses
from the fuse block.
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
passenger side of the vehicle, on the lower portion
of the instrument panel near the floor.
Remove the panel cover to access the fuse block,
then remove the fuse block cover to access the fuses.
Your vehicle might not have all the fuses and
features listed.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
POWER
MIRRORS
Usage
Fuses
RUN/CRANK
HVAC
Usage
Cruise Control Switch, Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator
Power Mirrors
Not Used
NOT
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
INSTALLED
BLOWER HIGH Blower - High Speed Relay
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
CLUSTER/
THEFT
ONSTAR
NOT
INSTALLED
Instrument Panel Cluster,
Theft Deterrent System
DOOR LOCK
ROOF/
HEAT SEAT
NOT
INSTALLED
Door Locks
Sunroof, Power Windows
Not Used
OnStar®
Not Used
AIRBAG (IGN) Airbag (Ignition)
NOT
Not Used
INSTALLED
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
Control Diagnostic Link Connector
(Battery)
HVAC
CTRL (BATT)
AIRBAG (BATT) Airbag (Battery)
SPARE FUSE
Spare Fuse Holder
HOLDER
PEDAL
Adjustable Pedals
WIPER SW
IGN SENSOR
STRG WHL
ILLUM
NOT
INSTALLED
RADIO
INTERIOR
LIGHTS
REAR WIPER
POWER
WINDOWS
HVAC
CTRL (IGN)
HVAC
BLOWER
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
Ignition Switch
SPARE FUSE
Spare Fuse Holder
HOLDER
SPARE FUSE
Spare Fuse Holder
HOLDER
SPARE FUSE
Spare Fuse Holder
HOLDER
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
Steering Wheel Illumination
Not Used
Audio System
Interior Lamps
Not Used
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver side of the engine compartment, near the battery.
Power Windows
Your vehicle might not have all the fuses and
features listed.
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
Control (Ignition)
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
Blower Switch
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
Air Conditioner Clutch
Electronic Throttle Control
Belt Alternator Starter (BAS) IGN
Transmission, Transmission
Control Module Ignition 1
Belt Alternator Starter (BAS) Pumps
4
5
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
6
7
8
Emission
Left Headlamp Low-Beam
Horn
Right Headlamp Low-Beam
Left Headlamp High-Beam
Right Headlamp High-Beam
Engine Control Module BATT
Windshield Wiper
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) (IGN 1)
Engine Control Module (IGN 1)
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
41
Electric Power Steering
Transmission Control
Module Battery
Ignition Module
Injectors
Daytime Running Lamps
Center High-Mounted Stoplamps
Driver Power Window
Belt Alternator Starter (BAS) BATT
Transmission Pump Motor
Battery Voltage Sense
42
43
44
46
47
50
51
52
54
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Relays
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Usage
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
Cooling Fan 2
Starter
Run/Crank, Ignition
Powertrain
Air Conditioning Clutch
High-Beam Headlamp
Horn
Run Relay, Heating, Ventilation,
Air Conditioning Blower
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Body Control Module 1
Body Control Module Run/Crank
Rear Electrical Center 1
Rear Electrical Center 2
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Body Control Module 2
Starter
37
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Compartment Fuse Block
Relays
38
39
Usage
Low-Beam Headlamp
Windshield Wiper 1
40
Windshield Wiper 2
48
49
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Stoplamps
53
Transmission Pump Motor
Diodes
Usage
27
Wiper
The rear compartment fuse block is located in the
trunk of the vehicle. Access the fuse block through the
trunk panel on the driver side of the rear cargo area.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Passenger Seat Controls
Driver Seat Controls
Not Used
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
4
5
Emission 2, Canister Vent Solenoid
Park Lamps, Instrument
Panel Dimming
6
7
Not Used
Not Used
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
8
Usage
Fuses
23
24
Usage
Usage
Rear Window Defogger
Park Lamps
Not Used
Not Used
Rear Defog
Heated Mirrors
Fuel Pump
9
Sliding Panel Roof
Sunroof Controls
Not Used
10
11
12
13
14
15
25
Not Used
Relays
26
27
28
Audio Amplifier
Heated Seat Controls
Not Used
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System, XM™ Satellite
Radio, UGDO
Back-up Lamps
Not Used
Not Used
Auxiliary Power Outlets
Not Used
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Back-up Lamps
Not Used
Not Used
Trunk Release
Fuel Pump
Cargo Lamp
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Trunk Release
38 (Diode)
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant
charge amount, see the refrigerant caution
label located under the hood. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
8.1 qt
7.0 qt
7.7 L
6.6 L
Transmission (Bottom Pan Removal)
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
5.0 qt
4.7 L
16.3 gal
100 lb ft
61.7 L
140 Y
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4
5
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a
few times a week. Or you might drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might
use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might
drive it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
and change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids
and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
legal driving limits.
on page 5-6.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your
dealer/retailer do these jobs.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
{CAUTION:
If you want to purchase service information, see
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your dealer/retailer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your Own
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced, make
sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
might be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate that
vehicle service is necessary for over a year. However, the
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/
retailer has trained service technicians who will perform
this work using genuine parts and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the message
comes on within 10 months since the vehicle was
purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, you
must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since your last service. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
as needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Inspect underbody 36-volt battery
system cable. See footnote (l).
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter (severe service only).
See footnote (h).
•
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug
wires. An Emission Control Service.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Engine cooling system service
(or every five years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
•
•
•
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
page 5-81 for more information.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect electric power steering cables
for proper hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police,
or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure
test the cooling system and pressure cap.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and
latches, hood hinges and latches, and trunk lid hinges
and latches. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth
will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(g) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or
cruise control cables.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(l) Visually inspect underbody 36-volt battery system
cable for damage. Replace cable if necessary.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Owner Checks and Services
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-22.
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the
proper fluid if necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
At Least Once a Month
At Each Fuel Fill
Tire Inspection and Inflation Check
It is important to perform these underhood checks
at each fuel fill.
Inspect your vehicle’s tires for wear and make
sure they are inflated to the correct pressures.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
on page 2-28.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready
to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately
if the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and the transmission
in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
{CAUTION:
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could
be injured and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front of your
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to
apply the regular brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Check the sealant expiration date printed on the
instruction label of the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit (if equipped) at least once a year. See your
dealer/retailer for a replacement canister.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Engine oil which meets
GM Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute Certified for Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol.
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Anchor, and Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Engine Oil
To determine the proper viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 109435474).
Hood and
Door Hinges
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-22.
Engine
Coolant
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
Part Numbers
22676970
ACDelco® Part Numbers
A1627C
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
12605566
PF457G
Spark Plugs
12598004
41-103
Windshield Wiper Blades
Driver’s Side – 23.6 inches (60.0 cm)
Passenger’s Side – 21.0 inches (53.0 cm)
25800624
25800623
—
—
The engine drive belt on this hybrid vehicle is under
a higher tension than the engine drive belt on a
non-hybrid vehicle and requires the use of a special
kind of tool to service. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
Engine Drive Belt Routing
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,
record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
contact the Saturn Customer Communication Centre
at 1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer Assistance
Center team member will handle your call and assist
in providing product and warranty information, the
nearest retailer location, roadside assistance, brochures,
literature and discuss any concerns you may have.
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
retailer and to Saturn. Together we are committed to
providing our customers with unparalleled service,
before, during, and after the purchase of a Saturn vehicle,
for total customer satisfaction. We call this the Saturn
Difference. Normally, any concerns with the sales
transaction or the operation of your vehicle are resolved
by your retailer’s sales or service departments. If, for any
reason, your ownership experience falls below your
expectations, we suggest you take the following action:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please
have the following information available to give
the Customer Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This 17-digit
number can be found on the vehicle registration
or title, on the upper driver side corner of the
dash, or on your roadside assistance key card.
• The name of your selling and servicing retail facility.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer Assistance
Liaison. Any member of the retail management team has
the authority and the desire to resolve your concerns.
Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at this level.
When contacting Saturn, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
STEP TWO: Should you need additional assistance,
in the U.S., contact the Saturn Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-553-6000. In Canada,
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn and its
retailers are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,
Saturn and its retailers offer the additional assistance
of a neutral party through our voluntary participation
in a mediation/arbitration program called Better
Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line.
Contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using the
toll-free telephone number or by writing them at
the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court
program administered by the Council of Better
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. This program
is available at no cost to you, our customer.
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle
age, mileage and other factors. Saturn Corporation
reserves the right to change eligibility limitations
and/or discontinue its participation in this program.
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court
action, use of the program is free of charge and
your case is generally heard within 40 days. If you
do not agree with the decision given in your case,
you can reject it and proceed with any other venue
for relief available to you.
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns have
been addressed after following the procedure outlined
in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts involved
by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include
an informal hearing before the arbiter.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The program is designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time you file your
complaint to the final decision, should be completed
in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial
program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
The Owner Center is a resource for your Saturn
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information
can be found in one place.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you may
call the Saturn Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-1999, or you may write to:
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
To assist owners who have hearing difficulties,
Saturn has installed special TDD (Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf) equipment in its Saturn Customer
Assistance Center.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
Any hearing- or speech-impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or to a conventional Text
Telephone (TTY) can communicate with Saturn by
dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users in Canada may
dial 1-800-263-3830.
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Offices
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Saturn encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a customer wishes to
write to Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Code 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
1-800-553-6000
1-800-833-6000 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may
require for your vehicle such as hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000
In Canada, write to:
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Ltd.
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
The offer is available for a limited period of time from
the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the Saturn
Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-1999
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
In Canada, customers may call the Saturn Customer
Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
TTY users in Canada may call 1-800-263-3830.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service is covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available
if you have an active OnStar® subscription.
Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call 1-800-553-6000;
(Text Telephone (TTY): 1-800-889-2438).
To ensure security, the driver must present personal
identification before lock-out service is provided.
In Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Saturn Roadside
Assistance Program.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway
or Highway: Tow to the nearest Saturn retailer for
warranty service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling
crash. Winch-out assistance is provided when the
vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada,
a person driving this vehicle without the consent
of the owner is not eligible for coverage.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in
good condition, when equipped and properly
inflated, is covered at no charge. The customer
is responsible for the repair or replacement of
the tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.
Services Provided
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever comes first, and, in Canada only,
up to a maximum of $100.
charge if the vehicle does not start.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 Canada). In Canada, service
to provide diesel may be restricted. For safety
reasons, propane and other alternative fuels
are not provided through this service.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair order are required.
• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon
request, Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the most
scenic route to your destination, anywhere in
North America, along with helpful travel information
pertaining to your trip.
Once authorization has been given, your advisor
will help you make any necessary arrangements
and explain how to claim for trip interruption expense
assistance.
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There could
be times when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you will
be reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. Trip routing requests are limited
to six per calendar year.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
(Canada only): In the event of a warranty
related vehicle disablement, while en route and
over 250 kilometres from the original point of
departure, you might qualify for trip interruption
expense assistance. This assistance covers
reasonable reimbursement of up to a maximum
of $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night),
and (C) alternate ground transportation (maximum
of $40/day). This benefit is to assist you with
some of the unplanned expense you may incur
while waiting for your vehicle to be repaired.
In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.
However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty
repairs are the responsibility of the driver.
Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or reimbursement to an
owner or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims
become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to make any changes or discontinue the
Roadside Assistance program at any time without
notification.
Calling for Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside
Assistance Representatives:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number
Scheduling Service Appointments
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
of the vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) and delivery date of the vehicle
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
• Description of the problem
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated
on a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound
towing caused by a violation of local, Municipal,
State, Provincial or Federal law, and mounting,
dismounting or changing of snow tires, chains, or
other traction devices.
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shuttle Service
Courtesy Transportation
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Retailers may provide you
with shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the retailer’s area.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating retailers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for
vehicles with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada) and extended powertrain
warranty in both the U.S. and Canada.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the retailer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by Saturn for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your retailer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled
“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty
coverage information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, Saturn helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your retailer can offer you one of the following:
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Collision Damage Repair
Your retailer may arrange to provide you with a
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental
vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for
an overnight warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will
be limited and must be supported by original receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental
vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary
and may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible
for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or
rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician
using the proper equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your
vehicle’s resale value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known.
Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not
covered by that warranty.
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every retailer. Please contact your retailer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate retailer personnel.
Saturn reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change
or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant
to the terms and conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These
are made by companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,
these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts
are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such
parts are not covered by that warranty.
Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision
repair facility that meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have
a collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that
no one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection
to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for
damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until
all matters have been taken care of. Move your
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you
are instructed to move it by a police officer.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for a
police report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-7 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
with their work for a long time.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before
it is towed away. Make sure this includes your
insurance information and registration if you keep
these items in your vehicle.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
• Gather the important information you will need
from the other driver. Things like name, address,
phone number, driver’s license number, vehicle
license plate, vehicle make, model and model year,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), insurance
company and policy number, and a general
description of the damage to the other vehicle.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by
your GM vehicle warranty.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it could open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it could order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your retailer or Saturn Corporation.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the
repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
your repair professional, and insist on Genuine GM
parts. Remember if your vehicle is leased you may
be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with
Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits
with that company. In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays
within reasonable limits.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, or write:
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors
of Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510
or write to:
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Service Manuals
A variety of publications are available to you. Saturn
service manuals are written for trained technicians,
and in some cases, specialized tools and equipment
are necessary to complete certain repairs. However,
the manuals are available to owners who either have
the training, or wish to gain a greater understanding
of the technical aspect of their Saturn.
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, please notify Saturn.
Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:
Saturn Corporation
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Drop 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
For additional publications information or to order
publications in the United States, call toll free
1-800-2-SATURN or visit www.saturn-publications.com
to order on-line.
In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available by
calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small
number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or a qualified
technician may have to determine if a specific
bulletin applies to your vehicle. To order Saturn bulletins,
call Saturn Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
www.saturn-publications.com to order online.
Owner Publications
Information on how to obtain product bulletins and as
described below is applicable only in the fifty U.S. states
and the District of Columbia, and only for cars and
light trucks with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
less than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies of
individual bulletins are also at your participating
Saturn retailer. You can ask to see them.
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy
In Canada, information relating to product service
bulletins can be obtained by contacting your
Saturn retailer.
Your Saturn vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor
and control engine and transmission performance,
to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash and, if so equipped,
to provide antilock braking to help the driver control
the vehicle. These modules may store data to help
your dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle.
Some modules may also store data about how
you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
consumption or average speed. These modules
may also retain the owner’s personal preferences,
such as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and
Service Bulletins
Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service
bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors
product performance in the field. We then prepare
bulletins for servicing our products better. You can
get these bulletins, too.
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the
proper use and care of your vehicle. Some describe
costly repairs. Others describe inexpensive repairs
which, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoid
future costly repairs.
Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new
or unexpected condition. Others describe a quicker way
to fix your vehicle. They can help a technician service
your vehicle better.
temperature settings.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR
in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
Saturn will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee;
in response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of Saturn’s defense of
litigation through the discovery process; or, as required
by law. Data that Saturn collects or receives may
also be used for Saturn research needs or may be
made available to others for research purposes, where
a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific
vehicle or vehicle owner.
• How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to
the OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar
Terms and Conditions for information on data
on page 2-35 in this manual for more information.
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in Saturn vehicles does not
use or record personal information or link with any other
Saturn system containing personal information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of
the system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system
operating manual for information on stored data
and for deletion instructions.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Stop Mode ............................................. 3-42
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps Off in Park (P) ............................... 3-14
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mirrors (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service (cont.)
S
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
T
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Renesas Network Card REG10J0052 0200 User Guide
Rotel Cassette Player RD845 User Guide
Rotel Radio RT 850 User Guide
Samsung Computer Monitor SyncMaste 721B User Guide
Samsung DVD Player M301 User Guide
Samsung Home Theater System AH68 02231A User Guide
Samsung Laptop NP300E4CA0CVE User Guide
Scag Power Equipment Lawn Mower SWZV User Guide
Sears Lawn Mower 24737638 User Guide
Sears Treadmill 63129739 User Guide